Basicsof Bearings

‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﻐﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫أ‪.‬م‪.‬د‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺴﻦ اﻟﺸﻤﺮي‬

‫ﻛﻠﻳــــﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻧـــﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺭﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ‬

‫‪Basics of Bearings‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺃ‪.‬ﻡ‪.‬ﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺣﺳﻥ ﻋﺑﺩﷲ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺭﻱ‬
‫‪٢٠١٨‬‬ ‫ﻙ‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﻐﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﻡ‪.‬ﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺒﺪﷲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬
‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪SKF‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬
‫‪١٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬
‫‪١٦‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫‪١٨‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ‪Bearing Seals‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻱ‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫‪٤١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬ ‫ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻄﺮﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎ ً‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬
‫‪٧١‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬ ‫ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١٠٢‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١٠٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺤﻮﻡ‬
‫‪١٠٥‬‬ ‫ﻁﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ‬
‫‪١٠٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻬﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١١١‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬
‫‪١١٣‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺾ‬
‫‪١١٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ‬

‫‪١١٧‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫‪١٢٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺸﻴﺮ ‪Flaking‬‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺸﺮ ‪Peeling‬‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻈﻲ ‪Spalling‬‬
‫‪١٣٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻄﺦ ‪Smearing‬‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ‪Stepped wear‬‬
‫‪١٣٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻘﻊ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪Speckles and Discoloration‬‬
‫‪١٣٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺰﻳﺰ )ﺍﻟﺘﻠﺜﻢ ( ‪Indentation‬‬
‫‪١٣٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺘﺬﺍﺫ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﺭ( ‪Chipping‬‬
‫‪١٣٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻘﻖ ‪Cracking‬‬
‫‪١٣٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺔ ‪Rust and Corrosion‬‬
‫‪١٣٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺟﻨﺔ )ﺍﻹﻟﺘﺼﺎﻕ( ‪Seizing‬‬
‫‪١٤٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻚ ‪Fretting and Fretting Corrosion‬‬
‫‪١٤١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ‪Electrical Pitting‬‬
‫‪١٤٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻼﻥ ﻣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ ‪Rolling Path Skewing‬‬
‫‪١٤٣‬‬ ‫ﺗﻀﺮﺭ ﻗﻔﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ‪Damage of Retainers‬‬
‫‪١٤٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺣﻒ ‪Creeping‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴ ﺔ ﺑﺼ ﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣ ﺔ ﺃﻣ ﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜ ﻮﻥ ﺣﺮﻛ ﺔ ﺧﻄﻴ ﺔ )ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳ ﺔ( ﺃﻭ‪ /‬ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛ ﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳ ﺔ‬
‫)ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﻴ ﺔ ﺗﺴ ﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛ ﺔ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻁ ﻮﻝ ﺧ ﻂ ﻣﺴ ﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺜ ﻞ ﺣﺮﻛ ﺔ ﺩﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﻳﻐﻠﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤ ﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺧ ﻼﻝ ﻫﺎﻭﺯﻧ ﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻧ ﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳ ﺔ ﻫ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻧﻴ ﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠ ﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﻫﺮﻳﺎً‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻛﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳ ﻖ ﺍﻟﺸ ﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺘﺪﺣﺮﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﻀ ﻬﺎ ﺍﻟ ﺒﻌﺾ‪ .‬ﺃﻣ ﺎ ﻋ ﻦ‬
‫ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻥ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻥ ﺫﺍﺗﻴ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻟﻴ ﻖ ﺣﻴ ﺚ ﺍﻧﻬ ﺎ ﺗﺤﺘ ﻮﻱ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺍﻟﻤ ﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻟﻘ ﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼ ﻮﻝ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺗﺒ ﺎﻁ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸ ﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌ ﺪﻥ ﻓ ﻲ ﻧﻔ ﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﺎﻝ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺫﻟ ﻚ ﺣﻴ ﺚ‬

‫ﻳﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﻀ ﻬﺎ ﻋ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻌ ﺾ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻠﻴ ﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻧﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻻﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺮﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺃﺧ ﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄ ﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻭﺑﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ )ﻫﺎﻭﺯﻧﻚ(‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻟﻴﻖ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ً ﺟﺰء ﻣﻬﻢ ﺟ ﺪﺍ ً ﻣ ﻦ ﻧﻈ ﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺳ ﻨﺎﺩ ﻷﻥ‬
‫ﻟ ﻪ ﺍﻟ ﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴ ﺮ ﻓ ﻲ ﻣﻨ ﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛ ﻞ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻷﺟ ﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳ ﺔ ﻟﻐ ﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺼ ﻮﻝ ﻋﻠ ﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣ ﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿ ﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺫﻟ ﻚ ﺗﻌﺘﺒ ﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺘ ﺎﻡ )‪ (Seals‬ﺍﺟ ﺰﺍء ﻣﻬﻤ ﺔ ﺟ ﺪﺍ ً ﻣ ﻦ ﺃﺟ ﺰﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻷﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ً ﺣﻴﻮﻳﺎ ً ﺟﺪﺍ ً ﻓﻲ ﺑﻘﺎء ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺃﻁﻮﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺣﻴ ﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻓ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻟﻬ ﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺃﺻ ﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻷﺧﺘ ﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﻮﺕ ﺃﺣ ﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻤ ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤ ﺔ ﻟﺸ ﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.SKF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺟ ﺬﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺠﺮ ﻣﺮﺗ ﺐ ﺗﺤ ﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌ ﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺭﺥ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻫﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨ ﺎﻙ ﺩﻟﻴ ﻞ ﺃﻛﻴ ﺪ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻫ ﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘ ﺄﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜ ﺔ ﺗﺴ ﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔ ﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒ ﺪﺃ ﻭﻓ ﻲ ﺑﻌ ﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴ ﺎﻥ ﺗﺴ ﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜ ﺮﺍﺕ ﺑ ﺪﻻً ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻ ﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟ ﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﻛﺎﻧ ﺖ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺸ ﺐ ﻟﻜ ﻦ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮﺍﻣﻴﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗ ﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺿ ﺮ ﻓﻴ ﺘﻢ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌ ﺎﺩﻥ ﻣﺜ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺤ ﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻮﻻﺫ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻳﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫ ﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘ ﺔ ﺣﺘ ﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺠ ﺎﺭ ﺗ ﻢ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺣﺼ ﻞ ﻓ ﻲ ﺳ ﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻴ ﺐ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠ ﻮﺍﻫﺮ ﻓﻘ ﺪ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻷﺣﺠ ﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺨﻔ ﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﻭﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻌﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺴ ﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤ ﺔ ﻓﻜﻠﻤ ﺎ ﻛ ﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤ ﻞ ﻧ ﺎﻋﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻕ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺸﺐ ﻣﺎﺯﺍﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻪ ﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻠﻌﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤ ﺎء ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ً‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍ ً ﻛﺰﻳﺖ ﺗﺰﻟﻴﻖ ﻭﻛﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺴ ﻤﻨﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺴ ﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺴ ﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼ ﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺃﺑﺴ ﻂ ﺍﻷﻧ ﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟ ﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﻫ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤ ﻲ ) ‪Sleeve‬‬
‫‪ (Bearing‬ﺍﻟ ﺬﻱ ﻫ ﻮ ﻓﻘ ﻂ ﻋﺒ ﺎﺭﺓ ﻋ ﻦ ﺍﺳ ﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻮﺿ ﻮﻋﺔ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠ ﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫ ﺎ‪ .‬ﺛ ﻢ ﺗﺒﻌﻬ ﺎ ﻧ ﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣ ﺪﺓ ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟ ﺬ ﻳﺤ ﻮﻱ ﻗﻔ ﺺ ﻳﺤﻤ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻜ ﺮﺍﺕ ﻗ ﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﻨﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﺟﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﺭﻳﺴﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘ ﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘ ﺔ ﺟ ﺪﺍ ً ﻟﻀ ﺒﻂ ﺍﻟ ﺰﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٧٦٠‬ﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻗ ﺪﻡ ﻣﺜ ﺎﻝ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺸ ﺐ ﻫ ﻮ ﻣ ﺲ ﻛ ﺮﻭﻱ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺸ ﺐ ﺍﻟ ﺬﻱ ﻳﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﻀ ﺪﺓ ﺩﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻗ ﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸ ﻒ ﺫﻟ ﻚ ﻣ ﻦ ﺑﻘﺎﻳ ﺎ ﺳ ﻔﻴﻨﺔ ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴ ﺔ ﻣﺼ ﻨﻮﻉ ﻋ ﺎﻡ ‪ ٤٠‬ﻕ‪.‬ﻡ‪ .‬ﻛﻤ ﺎ ﻗﻴ ﻞ ﺍﻥ ﻟﻴﻮﻧ ﺎﺭﺩﻭ ﺩﺍﻓﻨﺸ ﻲ ﻫ ﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺮﻉ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳ ﺔ ﺣ ﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻋ ﺎﻡ ‪١٥٠٠‬ﻡ ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺃﺣ ﺪ ﺍﻷﻣ ﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟ ﻮﺩﺓ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳ ﺔ ﻫ ﻲ ﻗ ﺪﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺘﻜ ﺎﻙ ﻓﻴﻤ ﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬ ﺎ ﻣﺴ ﺒﺒﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻜ ﺎﻙ ﺍﺿ ﺎﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﻟ ﺬﻱ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜ ﻦ ﻣﻨﻌ ﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﻔ ﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻷﻗﻔ ﺎﺹ ﺍﻛﺘﺸ ﻔﺖ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣ ﺮﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﻏ ﺎﻟﻴﻠﻮ ﻋ ﺎﻡ‬
‫‪١٦٠٠‬ﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺑﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻌﻠﻘﺖ ﺑﻤﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ )‪ (ball race‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﻣ ﺎﺭﺛﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪١٧٩٤‬ﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻠﺖ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﻓﺮﻳﺪﺭﻳﻚ ﻓﺸﺮ ﻋ ﺎﻡ ‪١٨٨٣‬ﻡ ﻓ ﻲ ﺗﻔﺮﻳ ﺰ ﺍﻟﻜ ﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﻌﻴﻤﻬ ﺎ ﻟﺘﺼ ﻞ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺃﺣﺠ ﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﺴ ﺎﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﺎ ً ﻭﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺷ ﻜﻞ ﻛ ﺮﺓ ﺩﻗﻴ ﻖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﻁﺮﻳﻘ ﺔ ﺗﺼ ﻨﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳ ﺒﺔ ﺷ ﻜﻠﺖ ﺍﻷﺳ ﺎﺱ ﻓ ﻲ ﺧﻠ ﻖ ﺻ ﻨﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻷﺻﻄﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻳﻨﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻔﻴﻦ ﻭﻧﻜﻮﺳ ﺖ )‪ (Sven Wingquist‬ﻓ ﻲ ﺷ ﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ SKF‬ﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪١٩٠٧‬ﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨ ﺮﻱ ﺗﻤﻜ ﻦ )‪(Henry Timken‬ﻫ ﻮ ﺻ ﺎﺣﺐ ﺑ ﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺘ ﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻ ﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘ ﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺘﺪﻗ ﺔ )‪ (Tapered Roller Bearings‬ﻓ ﻲ ﻋ ﺎﻡ ‪١٨٩٨‬ﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻌ ﺎﻡ ﺍﻟ ﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻴ ﻪ‬
‫ﺃﺳ ﺲ ﺷ ﺮﻛﺔ ﻷﻧﺘ ﺎﺝ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻋ ﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺧ ﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘ ﺮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴ ﻪ ﺗﻄ ﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺮﻛﺔ ﻷﻧﺘ ﺎﺝ ﻛ ﻞ ﺃﻧ ﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻻﺫﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺠﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺃﻥ ﺃﻗ ﺪﻡ ﻋﻤ ﻞ ﻛ ﺎﻥ ﻣ ﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀ ﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻌ ﺎﻟﻲ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻀ ﻐﻮﻁﺔ( ) ‪Pressurized‬‬
‫‪ (Bearings‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪١٨٧٨‬ﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﻣﻌ ﺮﺽ ﺑ ﺎﺭﻳﺲ ﺍﻟﺼ ﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟ ﺬﻱ ﺃﻋﻄ ﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻬ ﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺣ ﺪ ﻟﻤﺤﺎﺗ ﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻟ ﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻀ ﻐﻮﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌ ﺮﺽ ﻛ ﺎﻥ ﻫﻨ ﺎﻝ ﻫﻴﻜ ﻞ ﺣﺪﻳ ﺪﻱ ﺑ ﺄﺭﺑﻊ ﺳ ﻴﻘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻮﻻﺫﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳ ﻖ ﺿ ﺦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴ ﻴﻘﺎﻥ ﻭﺑﻀ ﻐﻂ ﻣﻨﺎﺳ ﺐ ﻛ ﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﻳﻄﻮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻳﺘﺤﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﺤ ﺮﻙ ﻋﺮﺑ ﺔ ﻋﻠ ﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫أ‪.‬م‪.‬د‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺴﻦ اﻟﺸﻤﺮي‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﻐﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﻡ‪.‬ﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺒﺪﷲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺮﻱ‬
‫)‪(History of SKF‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟـ ‪SKF‬‬

‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﺍﻟـ ‪ (Swedish Aeroengine Bearings Company) SKF‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪. ١٩٠٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘ ﺪﺃﺕ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻬ ﺎ ﺑﻌ ﺪ ﺑ ﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﺧﺘ ﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺗﻴ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﺪﻳﻞ ) ‪Self-aligning ball‬‬
‫‪ .(bearing‬ﻓ ﻲ ﻋ ﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩١٢‬ﻟﻠﺸ ﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﻤﺜﻴ ﻞ ﻓ ﻲ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﻭﻟ ﺔ ﻭﻓ ﻲ ‪ ١٩٣٠‬ﻓﺄﻧﻬ ﺎ ﺗﻤﺘﻠ ﻚ ﻛ ﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻌ ﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ ٢١٠٠٠‬ﻣﻮﻅﻒ ﻳﻌﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٢‬ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪ .‬ﺃﺳﺎﺭ ﺟﺎﺑﺮﻳﻠﺴﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺮﻛﺔ ﻫ ﻮ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﻟﻔﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ SKF‬ﻣﻮﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻭﻝ ‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﺳ ﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣ ﻦ ﺳ ﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻟﻔﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪.١٩٢٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩١٠‬ﺍﻣﺘﻠﻜﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﻭ‪ ٣٢٥‬ﻣﻮﻅﻒ ﻣﻨﻪ ‪ %١٥‬ﻳﻌﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩١١‬ﺍﻣﺘﻠﻜﺖ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩١٣‬ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﺮﻉ ﻭﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻤﺎﺭﻙ‬
‫ﻓ ﻲ ﻋ ﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩١٤‬ﻓ ﺘﺢ ﻟﻬ ﺎ ﻓ ﺮﻭﻉ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻨ ﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻭﺑﻠﺠﻴﻜ ﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻮﻟﻨ ﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺳ ﻴﺎ ﻭﻣﺘﺠ ﺮ ﺑﻴ ﻊ ﻓ ﻲ ﺟﻨ ﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩١٥‬ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺫﻭ ﺍﺧﺪﻭﺩ ﻋﻤﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓ ﻲ ﻋ ﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩١٨‬ﺍﺧﺘ ﺮﻉ )ﺍﺭﻓﻴ ﺪ ﺑ ﺎﻟﻤﻐﺮﻥ( ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘ ﺪﺣﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻜ ﺮﻭﻱ ) ‪spherical roller‬‬
‫‪(Bearing‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩١٩‬ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻣﺒﻴﻌﺎﺗﻬﺎ ‪ ٦٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٢٦‬ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻮﻟﻔﻮ )ﺃﺣﺪ ﻓﺮﻭﻉ ‪ (SKF‬ﺑﺎﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٣٠‬ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ١٢‬ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﻭ ‪ ٢١٠٠٠‬ﻣﻮﻅﻒ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ‪ %٦٦‬ﻳﻌﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٣٤‬ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٣٥‬ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻮﻟﻔﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ‪SKF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٣٨‬ﺍﻧﺘﺠﺖ ﻭﺣ ﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺤ ﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﻋﺠ ﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴ ﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤ ﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺼ ﻔﻮﻑ ﺯﺍﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٤٠‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٤٣‬ﺍﻓﺘﺘﺤﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﺯﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺟﻨﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٤٨‬ﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٥٠‬ﺍﺻ ﺒﺢ ﻋ ﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤ ﻞ ‪ ١٢‬ﻭﺑﻌ ﺪﺩ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤ ﻮﻅﻔﻴﻦ ﻳﺒﻠ ﻎ ‪ ٣١٠٠٠‬ﻣ ﻨﻬﻢ ‪ %٦٦‬ﻳﻌﻤﻠ ﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺃﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ ﻭﺃﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٥٧‬ﺃﻛﻤﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻛﻮﺫﻧﺒﻴﺮﻍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٦٣‬ﺍﻓﺘﺘﺢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺤﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٦٤‬ﺗﻢ ﺑﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺗﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓ ﻲ ﻋ ﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٧٠‬ﺃﺻ ﺒﺢ ﻋ ﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣ ﻞ ‪ ٦٨‬ﻣﻌﻤ ﻞ ﻭ ‪ ٦٧٠٠٠‬ﻣﻮﻅ ﻒ ﻣ ﻨﻬﻢ ‪ %٧٨‬ﻳﻌﻤﻠ ﻮﻥ ﺧ ﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٧٢‬ﺍﻓﺘﺘﺤﺖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺤﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٨٦‬ﺍﻣﺘﻠﻜﺖ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ MRC‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٨٨‬ﻧﺎﻟ ﺖ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺮﻛﺔ ﺷ ﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻷﺳ ﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺷ ﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺧ ﺮﻯ ﻓ ﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴ ﺎ‪ .‬ﺑ ﺪﺃﺕ ﻛﻠﻴ ﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ‪ SKF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓ ﻲ ﻋ ﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٨٩‬ﺍﻣﺘﻠﻜ ﺖ ﺷ ﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﻘﻨﻴ ﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻣ ﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﺗﻨ ﺘﺞ ﺃﺟﻬ ﺰﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﻭﺃﻋﻴ ﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.SKF Condition Monitoring‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٩٠‬ﺍﻣﺘﻠﻜﺖ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ )‪ Chicago Rawhide (CR‬ﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ‪.Oil Seals‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٩٤‬ﺍﻓﺘﺘﺤﺖ ‪ SKF‬ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺠﻴﻜﺎ ﺑﺄﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪ SKF‬ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٩٥‬ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ٩٠‬ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﻭ‪ ٤٤٠٠٠‬ﻣﻮﻅﻒ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ‪ %٨٤‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓ ﻲ ﻋ ﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٩٧‬ﺃﺻ ﺒﺤﺖ ﻫﻨ ﺎﻙ ﺃﻋﻤ ﺎﻝ ﻣﺸ ﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺼ ﻴﻦ ﺃﺣ ﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﺼ ﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻣﺒﻴﻌ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻣ ﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸ ﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻣ ﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋ ﺔ )‪ (Wafangdian Group‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨ ﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺒ ﺎﺭﺯ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺼ ﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺮﻭﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﺎﻡ ‪ Oil Seals‬ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺷﻴﻜﺎﻏﻮ ﻭ ‪.ANZAG‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋ ﺎﻡ ‪ ٢٠٠٠‬ﺍﻣﺘﻠﻜ ﺖ ‪ SKF‬ﺷ ﺮﻛﺔ ﺻ ﻴﺎﻥ ﺳ ﻜﻮﺗﻼﻧﺪﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘ ﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﺷ ﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻣ ﻊ ﺷ ﺮﻛﺔ ‪Brembo‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻷﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ )‪.(electro-mechanical braking system‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ )‪(Selection of Bearings‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬

‫ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻ ﺔ ﺑ ﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﺗﺠﻌﻠ ﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳ ﺒﺎ ً ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴ ﻖ ﻣﻌ ﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟ ﻴﺲ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺼ ﻌﺐ ﻭﺿ ﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻋ ﺪ ﻋﺎﻣ ﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴ ﻖ ﻻﺧﺘﻴ ﺎﺭ ﻧ ﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺣﻴ ﺚ ﺍﻥ ﻫﻨ ﺎﻙ ﻋﻮﺍﻣ ﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺧﺬ ﺑﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳ ﻮﻑ ﻳ ﺄﺗﻲ ﺫﻛﺮﻫ ﺎ ﻻﺣﻘ ﺎ ً ﺳ ﻮﻑ ﺗﻔﻴ ﺪ ﻓ ﻲ ﺗﻌﻴ ﻴﻦ ﺗﻠ ﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﺳ ﺘﺆﺧﺬ ﺑﻨﻈ ﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻً ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻫﻨ ﺎﻙ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺍﻷﻗ ﻞ ﺑﻌ ﺪ ﻭﺍﺣ ﺪ ﻣ ﻦ ﺃﺑﻌ ﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ )ﺍﻟﻘﻄ ﺮ ﺍﻟ ﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻋ ﺎﺩﺓ( ﻣﺤﺴ ﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺴ ﺒﻘﺎ ً ﻋﻨ ﺪ ﺗﺼ ﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﻨ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﻫ ﻮ ﺟ ﺰء ﻣﻨﻬ ﺎ‪ .‬ﻳ ﺘﻢ ﻋ ﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﻴ ﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳ ﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧ ﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴ ﻖ )‪ (Deep Groove Ball Bearings‬ﻟﻸﻋﻤ ﺪﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﻄ ﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼ ﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻧﺴ ﺒﻴﺎ ً ﺑﻴﻨﻤ ﺎ ﻳ ﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴ ﺎﺭ ﻫ ﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨ ﻮﻉ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻹﺿ ﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟ ﻰ ﻣﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤ ﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳ ﻄﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ ) ‪Cylindrical‬‬
‫‪ (Roller Bearings‬ﻭﻣﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤ ﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳ ﺔ )‪(Spherical Roller Bearings‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧ ﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺸ ﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ )‪ (Radial Space‬ﻣﺤ ﺪﺩﺓ ﻓ ﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘ ﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀ ﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ً ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ) ‪Needle‬‬
‫‪ (Roller Bearings‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺃﻣ ﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛ ﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻴ ﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭﻱ )ِ‪ (Axial Space‬ﻗﻠﻴ ﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤ ﺪﻭﺩ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻨ ﺎ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻀ ﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫)‪ (Narrow Bearings‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌ ﺾ ﺃﻧ ﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳ ﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼ ﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣ ﺪ ) ‪Single Row‬‬
‫‪ (Ball Bearings‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺣﺮﺟ ﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼ ﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣ ﺪ ) ‪Single Row Roller‬‬
‫‪.(Bearings‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ ً ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﻄﺔ‬

‫‪ -١‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻫ ﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣ ﻞ ﻳﺤ ﺪﺩ ﻋ ﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠ ﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓ ﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴ ﻖ ﻣﻌ ﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺑﺼ ﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣ ﺔ ﻓ ﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ )‪ (Roller Bearings‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻤ ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻠﻄﺔ ﺃﻛﺜ ﺮ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ )‪ ، (Ball Bearings‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻳﺴ ﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﺳ ﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺣﻤ ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻔ ﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺪﻟ ﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤ ﺎ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻷﺣﻤ ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻴﻠ ﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﻤ ﺪﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﻄ ﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴ ﺮﺓ ﻓ ﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺣﺮﺟ ﺔ ) ‪Roller‬‬
‫‪ (Bearings‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﻂ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻋﻲ )‪(Radial Load‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪-:‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺑ ﺪﻭﻥ ﺷ ﻔﺔ ) ‪Cylindrical Roller‬‬
‫‪.(Bearings having one ring without flanges type N and NU‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤ ﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﺮﻳ ﺔ )‪ (Needle Roller Bearings‬ﻣﺎﻋ ﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ﺘﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﺮﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳ ﺔ )‪ (Needle Roller/Ball‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺮﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﻴ ﺔ ) ‪Needle‬‬
‫‪.(Roller/Thrust Bearings‬‬
‫ﺃﻣ ﺎ ﺑﻘﻴ ﺔ ﺍﻷﻧ ﻮﺍﻉ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺸ ﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ )‪ (Radial Bearings‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻬ ﺎ ﺍﺳ ﻨﺎﺩ ﺑﻌ ﺾ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤ ﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻱ )‪ (Axial Load‬ﺑﺎﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻋﻲ )‪.(Radial Load‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻱ )‪(Axial Load‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﻴﺔ )‪ (Thrust Ball Bearings‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓ ﻲ ﺇﺳ ﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺣﻤ ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻘ ﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﻴ ﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺠ ﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣ ﺪ ) ‪Single‬‬
‫‪ (Direction Thrust Ball Bearings‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﺳ ﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺣﻤ ﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺗﺠ ﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣ ﺪ ﻓﻘ ﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤ ﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ )‪ (Double Direction Thrust Ball Bearings‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨ ﺎ ﺇﺳ ﻨﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﻴ ﺔ )‪ (Cylindrical Thrust Bearings‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﺮﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﻴ ﺔ )‪ (Needle Thrust Bearings‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬ ﺎ ﺇﺳ ﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺣﻤ ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻴﻠ ﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠ ﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳ ﺔ )ٍ‪(Spherical Roller Thrust Bearings‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻻﺿ ﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟ ﻰ ﺇﺳ ﻨﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﺣﻤ ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻴﻠ ﺔ ﺟ ﺪﺍً( ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬ ﺎ ﺇﺳ ﻨﺎﺩ ﺑﻌ ﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻤ ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸ ﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ )‪(Combined Load‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻜ ﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛ ﺐ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺸ ﻌﺎﻋﻲ )‪ (Radial Load‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻤ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭﻱ ) ‪Axial‬‬
‫‪ (Load‬ﻳﺆﺛﺮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗ ﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻓ ﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺳ ﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻤ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭﻱ ﻫ ﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤ ﺎﺱ ‪ α‬ﻛﻤ ﺎ ﻣﺒ ﻴﻦ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺸ ﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧ ﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤ ﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﻗﻴﻤ ﺔ ﻫ ﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳ ﺔ ﻛﻠﻤ ﺎ ﻛ ﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺃﻛﺜ ﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻤ ﺔ ﻹﺳ ﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻤ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﻋﺎﻣ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭﻱ ‪Y‬‬
‫)‪ (Axial Load Factor‬ﻳﻘ ﻞ ﺑﺰﻳ ﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳ ﺔ ‪ α‬ﻭﻛ ﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺄﻧ ﻪ ﻳﻌﻄ ﻲ ﻣﺆﺷ ﺮﺍ ً ﻟﻠﻘ ﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺴ ﺒﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻹﺳ ﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺣﻤ ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻳ ﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﺗﺨ ﺺ ﻋﺎﻣ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭﻱ ‪Axial ) Y‬‬
‫‪ (Load Factor‬ﺗﻌﻄﻰ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺺ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻹﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﻫﻲ‪-:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳ ﺔ ﺑﺘﻤ ﺎﺱ ﺯﺍﻭﻱ ﺑﺼ ﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺻ ﻔﻴﻦ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻜ ﺮﺍﺕ ) ‪Single and Double‬‬
‫‪.(Row Angular Contact Ball Bearing‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻗﺔ )‪(Taper Roller Bearings‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻖ )‪(Deep Groove Ball Bearings‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ )‪(Spherical Roller Bearings‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )‪(Self-Aligning Ball Bearings‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ ) ‪Cylindrical Roller Bearings type NJ, NUP,‬‬
‫‪(NJ with angle ring HJ‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ ً ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ )‪( Misalignment‬‬

‫ﻋﻨ ﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺤ ﺮﻑ ﻣﺤ ﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤ ﻮﺩ )‪ (Shaft Axis‬ﻧﺴ ﺒﺔ ﺇﻟ ﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛ ﺰﻱ ﻟﻌﻠﺒ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‬
‫)‪ (Bearing Housing‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ً ﻓ ﻲ‬
‫ﻫ ﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟ ﺔ‪ .‬ﻫ ﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﻫ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳ ﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻴ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﺎﺫﺍﺓ ) ‪Self-Aligning Ball‬‬
‫‪ (Bearings‬ﻭﻛ ﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﺤﺎﻣ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻤ ﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﻴ ﺔ ) ‪Spherical Roller Thrust‬‬
‫‪.(Bearings‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻁﺌ ﺔ ﻫ ﻮ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤ ﻮﺩ ﻧﻔﺴ ﻪ ﺑﺴ ﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﺣﻤ ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻠﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﺸ ﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻋ ﺪ ﻋﻠ ﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ )‪(Bearing Housing Seating‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻨﺼﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻋﺪ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﺍً‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳ ﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻤﻮﺡ ﺑ ﻪ ﻟﻌ ﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﺎﺫﺍﺓ‪ .‬ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻫ ﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻧﺤ ﺮﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺗﻴ ﺎ ً ﻫ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻣ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﻴ ﺔ ) ‪Thrust‬‬
‫‪ (Ball Bearings‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻔﻠﻜ ﺎﺕ ﻛﺮﻭﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠ ﺐ )‪ (Spherical Housing Washers‬ﻭﺃﻳﻀ ﺎ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ . (Y-Bearings) Y‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﻼﺣﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺎ ً ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )‪(Speed‬‬

‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴ ﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳ ﺪﻭﺭ ﺑﻬ ﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤ ﺪﺣﺮﺝ ﺗﻜ ﻮﻥ ﻣﺤ ﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟ ﺔ ﺣ ﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸ ﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻠ ﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜ ﺎﻙ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘ ﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻁﺌ ﺔ ﻓ ﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﻴ ﺪ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴ ﺔ ﺗﻜ ﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳ ﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺴ ﺮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻠﻂ ﻣ ﻦ ﻧ ﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﻤ ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸ ﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ )‪ ، (Radial Loads‬ﻓ ﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺴ ﺮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳ ﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧ ﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴ ﻖ ) ‪Deep Groove‬‬
‫‪ (Ball Bearings‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤ ﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳ ﻄﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧ ﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴ ﻖ ) ‪Deep Groove‬‬
‫‪ . (Cylindrical Roller Bearings‬ﺃﻣ ﺎ ﻟﻸﺣﻤ ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒ ﺔ ﻓ ﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳ ﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤ ﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻱ )‪ (Angular Contact Ball Bearings‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﺴﺎ ً ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(Precision‬‬

‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻛﺜ ﺮ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳ ﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨ ﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜ ﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻟ ﻚ ﻁﻠﺒ ﺎﺕ ﺻ ﺎﺭﻣﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴ ﺔ ﺩﻗ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤ ﻞ ﻣﺜ ﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻣﺴ ﻚ ﺍﻟﻌ ﺪﺓ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜ ﺎﺋﻦ‬
‫)‪ (Machine Tool Spindles‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻸﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﺗ ﺪﻭﺭ ﺑﺴ ﺮﻉ ﻋﺎﻟﻴ ﺔ ﺟ ﺪﺍً‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﻤ ﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺩﺳﺎ ً ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ )ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ( )‪(Silent Running‬‬

‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺟﻮﻫﺮﻳﺎ ً ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴ ﺔ‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺟﺪﺍ ً ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ً ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧ ﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻖ )‪ (Deep Groove Ball Bearings‬ﻟﻬﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺑﻌﺎ ً ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺠﺴﺎءﺓ )‪(Stiffness‬‬

‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸ ﻮﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻧ ﺔ ُ‪ Elastic Deformation‬ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺣﺮﺟ ﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠ ﺔ ﺟ ﺪﺍ ً ﻭﻓ ﻲ ﺃﻏﻠ ﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺴﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌ ﺪﺩ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜ ﺎﺋﻦ‬
‫)‪. (Machine Tool Work Spindles‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ ﻭﻣﺠﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤ ﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳ ﻄﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (Cylindrical Roller Bearing‬ﻭﻣﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤ ﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺘﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫)‪ (Taper Roller Bearing‬ﻓﺄﻧﻬ ﺎ ﺗﻤﺘﻠ ﻚ ﺟﺴ ﺎءﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴ ﺔ ﺟ ﺪﺍ ً ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧ ﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﺎﻣ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳ ﺔ ) ‪Ball‬‬
‫‪ .(Bearing‬ﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺗﺤﺴ ﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺴ ﺎءﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻁﺮﻳﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘ ﺪﻡ‬
‫)‪.(Preloading‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻣﻨﺎ ً ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺰﺣﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻱ )‪(Axial Displacement‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﺴ ﺐ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴ ﺎﺩﻱ ﻷﻱ ﻣﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻹﺳ ﻨﺎﺩ ﻋﻤ ﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟ ﺰء ﺁﺧ ﺮ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﻨ ﺔ ﻳﺸ ﻤﻞ ﻣﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﺑ ﺖ‬
‫)‪ (Fixed‬ﻭﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺣ ﺮ )‪ .(Free‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺿ ﻊ ﺑﺤﻴ ﺚ ﺗﻤﻨ ﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺼ ﺎﻕ )ﺍﻟﻜﻤ ﺶ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻱ )‪ (Axial Nipping‬ﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺜﻼً ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳ ﻄﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣ ﺪﺓ )‪ (Single Ring‬ﻭﺑ ﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺎﻓ ﺎﺕ ﻧ ﻮﻉ )‪ NU‬ﻭ ‪ (N‬ﻭﺃﻳﻀ ﺎ ً ﻣﺤﺎﻣ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻤ ﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﺮﻳ ﺔ‬
‫‪. Needle Roller Bearing‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺳﻌﺎ ً ‪ :‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ‪Mounting and dismounting‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺣﻠﻘ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠ ﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺰﺋ ﺔ ﻣﺜ ﻞ )ﻣﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤ ﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳ ﻄﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤ ﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻗﺔ( ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻧﻔﺮﺍﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ )‪ (Interference Fit‬ﻟﻜﻼ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴ ﺖ ﻭﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟ ﺔ ﻓﺄﻧ ﻪ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺴ ﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻧ ﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺴ ﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟ ﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻓ ﺾ ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺰﺋ ﺔ ﻣﺜ ﻞ )ﻣﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳ ﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧ ﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴ ﻖ ﻭﻣﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳ ﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻱ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻕ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ )‪ (Adapter‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ )‪. (Withdrawal Sleeves‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺇﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻭﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ‪Load Carrying Capacity and Life‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠ ﻮﺏ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴ ﻖ ﻣﻌ ﻴﻦ ﻳ ﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴ ﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺃﺳ ﺎﺱ ﺳ ﻌﺔ ﺇﺳ ﻨﺎﺩﻩ ﻟﻸﺣﻤ ﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻠﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺑ ﺎﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻮﻟﻴ ﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘ ﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻤﺎﺓ ﺗﺨﻤ ﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤ ﻞ ﺍﻷﺳ ﺎﺱ‬
‫)‪ (Basic Load Rating‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻟﻸﺣﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ‪ C‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ‪ Co‬ﺗﺆﺧﺬ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ‪Basic Load Rating‬‬

‫ﺍﻥ ﺗﺨﻤ ﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤ ﻞ ﺍﻷﺳ ﺎﺱ ﺍﻟ ﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛ ﻲ( ‪ C‬ﻳﺴ ﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺤﺴ ﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﺗﺘﻀ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬ ﺪﺓ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴ ﺎ ً ﻣﺜ ﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴ ﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﺗﻌﻤ ﻞ ﺗﺤ ﺖ ﺗ ﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﻤ ﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﻫ ﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤ ﺔ ﺗﻌﺒ ﺮ ﻋ ﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳ ﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻ ﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO 281‬ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺰﻻﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ )ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻦ( ‪ Co‬ﻓﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓ ﻲ ﺣﺴ ﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴ ﺮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻁﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﺑﺬﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ‪Life‬‬
‫ﻳﻌ ﺮﻑ ﻋﻤ ﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺑﺄﻧ ﻪ ﻋ ﺪﺩ ﺍﻟ ﺪﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﻳ ﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ )ﺃﻭ ﻋ ﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴ ﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸ ﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴ ﺮﻉ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘ ﺔ( ﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﻳﺴ ﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳ ﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟ ﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻬ ﺎ ﻗﺒ ﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒ ﺪﺃ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺇﺷ ﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻔﺸ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻜ ﻼﻝ‬
‫)‪ (Fatigue‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ‪The Life Equation‬‬

‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻳ ﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤ ﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻳ ﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤ ﻞ ﺍﻟ ﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻷﺳ ﺎﺱ ﻣﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴ ﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪L10=(C/P)P‬‬
‫‪C/P = L101/P‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ = L10‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﺮ ﺑﻤﻼﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ = C‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ )‪(N‬‬
‫‪ = P‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ )‪(N‬‬
‫‪ = p‬ﺍﺱ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ P=3‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ )‪(Ball Bearings‬‬
‫‪ p=10/3‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ )‪(Roller Bearing‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ C/P‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺴ ﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸ ﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ ‪ L10h‬ﻫ ﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺘ ﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳ ﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴ ﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒ ﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺒﺎﻁ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ )‪(Bearing Closures‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟ ﻞ ﺍﻁﺎﻟ ﺔ ﻋﻤ ﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻓ ﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳ ﺔ )‪ (Radial Ball Bearing‬ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠ ﻪ ﻭﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺃﻳﻀ ﺎ ً ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﻘ ﻰ ﻧﻈﻴﻔ ﺎً‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺘ ﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺍ ً ﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻁﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺷ ﺬﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌ ﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧ ﺮﻯ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺩﺍﺧ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﻳ ﻒ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿ ﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺍﺑﻘ ﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺩﺍﺧ ﻞ ﺗﺠﻮﻳ ﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺎ ً ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﺎﻡ )‪ (Seals‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﻉ )‪ (Shields‬ﺗﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ )‪(Radial Ball Bearing‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻟﺨﺘﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪-:‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋ ﻦ ﻭﺍﺷ ﺮ ﻣﻌ ﺪﻧﻲ ﻣﻜﺒ ﻮﺱ ﻛﺎﻧ ﻪ ﻗ ﺮﺹ ‪ .‬ﺃﻧ ﻪ ﻳﻤﺜ ﻞ ﺍﺳ ﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻠ ﻖ ﺍﻷﻛﺜ ﺮ‬
‫ﺷ ﻴﻮﻋﺎ ً ﻭﺍﻷﻛﺜ ﺮ ﺍﻗﺘﺼ ﺎﺩﺍ ً ﻟﺠﺎﻧ ﺐ ﻭﺍﺣ ﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺠ ﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺸ ﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ ) ‪Radial Ball‬‬
‫‪ .(Bearing‬ﻳﺜﺒ ﺖ ﻫ ﺬﺍ ﺍﻟ ﺪﺭﻉ ﺑﺤ ﺰ ﻣﻮﺟ ﻮﺩ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴ ﺔ ﻟﻀ ﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻓﻀ ﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﺠ ﺎﺯ ﻭﻋ ﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺹ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴ ﺔ ﺗﻤﺴ ﻚ ﺑﺄﻗ ﻞ ﻗﻴﻤ ﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨ ﺔ ﻟﺤﺠ ﺰ ﺃﻛﺒ ﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻭﻣﻨﻊ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﺎﻡ )‪ (Seals‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﺎ ً ﻣ ﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴ ﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻤﺎﺳ ﺔ ﻣ ﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴ ﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺷ ﻔﺔ ﻣﻄﺎﻁﻴ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﻣﻄ ﺎﻁ ﺻ ﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻣﺴ ﺒﻮﻛﺔ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺣﻠﻘ ﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴ ﺔ ﺗﺴ ﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺨ ﺘﻢ‪ .‬ﻫ ﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺗﻌﻄ ﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣ ﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﺎﻧ ﺔ ﻟﻠﺨ ﺘﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺗﺼ ﻤﻴﻢ ﺷ ﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨ ﺘﻢ ﺗﺴ ﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛ ﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺘﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻔﺔ ﺳ ﻤﻴﻜﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴ ﻖ ﺍﻟ ﺘﻼﻣﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨ ﺎﻋﻢ ﻭﺗﺴ ﻠﻴﻂ ﺿ ﻐﻂ ﻣﺘﺴ ﺎﻭﻱ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺣﺎﻓ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴ ﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨ ﺘﻢ ﻣﺜﺒ ﺖ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺣ ﺰ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺿﺎﻏﻄﺎ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻮﻓﺮﺍ ً ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻁﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ – ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٠٥‬ﺩﺭﺟ ﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳ ﺔ ﻣﻤ ﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠ ﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳ ﺒﺎ ً ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘ ﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﺎﻧﻜﺎﺭﺩ )‪ (Vanguard‬ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ R‬ﺻﻤﻢ‬

‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺤ ﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻛ ﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻨ ﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜ ﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻅﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻤﻰ ‪ G‬ﻫ ﻮ ﺃﻳﻀ ﺎ ً ﺑﺸ ﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺣ ﺪﺓ ﻭﺻ ﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﻀ ﺮﻭﻑ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳ ﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴ ﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﻴ ﺚ ﺍﻟﻔﻀ ﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭﻱ ﻭﻓﻴﺮﻣ ﻮﻓﺮﺍ ً ﺣﻴ ﺰﺍ ً ﺍﺿ ﺎﻓﻴﺎ ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺮﻳﻞ )‪.(Nitrile Rubber‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺷ ﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺘ ﻚ ﺗﺘﺮﻛ ﺐ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴ ﺔ ﻟﺘ ﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺧ ﺘﻢ ﻓ ﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌ ﺪﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﻘ ﻮﻑ ﻭﻣﺜﺒ ﺖ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﻳ ﺔ ﺑﺤﻴ ﺚ‬
‫ﻳﺼ ﺒﺢ ﻣﻠﺤﻘ ﺎ ً ﺑﻬ ﺎ ﺑﺸ ﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋ ﻢ‪ .‬ﻛﻤ ﺎ ﺍﻧ ﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣ ﻞ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﻭﻳ ﺎ ً ﺑﺤﻴ ﺚ ﻳﻜ ﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺎ ً ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨ ﻮﻉ ‪ V‬ﻣﺠﻬ ﺰ ﺑﺸ ﻔﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟ ﺔ ﻭﻣﺼ ﻤﻢ ﻟﻴﻤﻠ ﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣ ﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻴ ﺔ‬

‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴ ﺔ ﻟﻠﻤ ﻞ ﻓ ﻲ ﻅ ﺮﻭﻑ ﻗﺎﺳ ﻴﺔ ﺟ ﺪﺍ ً ﻭﺳ ﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻁﺌ ﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻟ ﺔ‪ .‬ﻟ ﻪ ﻧﻔ ﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪.G‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨ ﻮﻉ ‪ T‬ﻣ ﺰﻭﺩ ﺑ ﺜﻼﺙ ﺷ ﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﻤ ﺎ ﻣﺒ ﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳ ﻢ ﻭﺻ ﻤﻤﺖ ﻟﻠﻌﻤ ﻞ‬

‫ﺑﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﻗﺴﻰ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﻴ ﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨ ﺎء ﻭﺑﺴ ﺒﺐ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻬ ﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺴ ﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻁﺌ ﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤ ﺎﺭﺱ ﻣﻜ ﻮﻥ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻔ ﻮﻻﺫ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ )‪(Bearing Numbering System‬‬

‫ﺃﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻼً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻭﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﺩﻗﺘﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺠﺎﻣﻴﻊ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼ ﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴ ﻲ ﻭﺃﺑﻌ ﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻄ ﺮ ﺍﻟ ﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤ ﺎﺱ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣ ﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻤﻴﻠﻴ ﺔ ﻓﺄﻧﻬ ﺎ ﻣﺸ ﺘﻘﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﺳﻠﺴ ﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣ ﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺩﺋ ﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺩﻗ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻭﻣﻘ ﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓ ﻖ ﺍﻟﺘ ﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣ ﻞ ﺍﻷﺧ ﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﻟﻬ ﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﻐﺪﺍﺩ‬/ ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ‬/ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺒﺪﷲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺮﻱ‬.‫ﺩ‬.‫ﻡ‬.‫ﺃ‬
Micro Bearing Numbering ‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬

‫ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ اﻟﺸﻤﺮي‬.‫د‬.‫م‬.‫أ‬
1. PREFIX
No Symbol: High carbon chrome bearing steel (equivalent to AISI E52100)
F: Martensitic stainless steel (equivalent to AISI 440C)
N: Beryllium copper
2. SERIES
67, 68: Metric series
R: Inch series
W: Wider than standard width (sealed type)
WA: Non-standard sizes
RA: Wider than standard width of inch series (open and sealed types)
FL: Flanged outer ring
FLA: Flanged outer ring, provided non-standard flange dimensions
3. CAGE
No Symbol: Pressed steel cage
J1: Pressed stainless steel cage
T1: Phenolic resin cage
T2: Nylon cage
٢٨
T3: Rulon machined cage
V: Cageless type
4. SEAL OR SHIELD
No symbol: Open Type
Z, ZZ: Steel shield(s)
ZA, ZZA: Removable steel shield(s)
ZA1, ZZA1: Removable stainless steel shield(s)
Z1, ZZ1: Stainless steel shield(s)
LB, LLB: Non-contact type rubber seal(s)
LF, LLF: Non-contact rubber seal(s)
LU, LLU: Contact type rubber seal(s)
SA, SSA: Non-contact nylon seal(s)
5. INTERNAL CLEARANCE
No Symbol: Normal clearance
C2: Clearance less than normal
C3: Clearance greater than normal
C4: Clearance greater than C3
C2S: Low group of C2 clearance
CNS: Low group of normal clearance
CNM: Medium group of normal clearance
CNL: High group of normal clearance
C3S: Low group of C3 clearance
C3M: Medium group of C3 clearance
C3L: High group of C3
6. TOLERANCE
No Symbol: ISO class 0 (equivalent to ABEC 1)
P6: ISO class 6 (equivalent to ABEC 3)
P5A: ISO class 5A
P4A: ISO class 4A
PS5: NTN PS class 5
PS4: NTN PS class 4
PX1: Special tolerance
7. PRELUBRICANT
1K: Kyodo Yushi Multemp PS No. 2
2A: Shell Alvania 2
1E: Exxon Andok C
3E: Exxon Beacon 325
6K: Klüber Isoflex Super LDS18
5C: Chevron SRI2
5K: Kyodo Yushi Multemp SRL
1W: Anderson Oil Winsor Lube L245X (oil)
٢٩
(Radial Bearing Numbering System) ‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻋﻳﺔ‬
1. PREFIX
TS2: Heat stabilization for up to 320° F (160° C)
2. TYPE
6: Single row deep groove ball bearings
8, WC8: Single row deep groove ball bearings
BL: Maximum capacity
DE & DF: Special double row ball bearings
SC & SX: Special single row ball bearings
R: Inch series
3. INTERNAL DESIGN
A: Internal redesign, from A onward
U: Universal seal groove for open bearings
4. CHAMFER
Xn: Special chamfer, from 1 onward (X1, X2 . . .)
5. CAGE
٣٠
No Symbol: Pressed steel cage
J: Pressed steel cage
T1: Phenolic cage
T2: Nylon cage
6. SEAL OR SHIELD
No Symbol: Open Type
LB, LLB: Non-contact rubber seal
LU, LLU: Double-lip contact rubber seal
LH,LLH: Light contact rubber seal
LUA,LLUA: Polyacrylic rubber seal
LUA1,LLUA1: Fluorocarbon rubber seal
Z, ZZ: Shield
Z1, ZZ1: Stainless steel shield
ZA, ZZA: Removable shield
7. RING MODIFICATION
N: Snap ring groove on outer ring, but without snap ring
NR: Snap ring groove on outer ring, snap ring included
/X.XX: Special bore, XX.XX in mm; Ex. 5/16” bore, /7.938
/XX.X: Special O.D., size XX.X in mm
C1: Radial clearance less than C2
C2: Radial clearance less than normal
C3: Radial clearance greater than normal
C4: Radial clearance greater than C3
CSXX: Special radial clearance; XX is mean value in 0.001 mm units
9. TOLERANCE
PXn: Special tolerance, from 1 onward (PX1, PX2 . . .)
Vn: Special requirement, from 1 onward (V1, V2 . . .)
٣١
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻱ )‪(Angular Contact Ball Bearing‬‬

‫‪٣٢‬‬
1. PREFIX
TS2: Heat stabilization for up to 320°F (160°C)
BNT: High speed angular contact ball bearings
HSB: High speed angular contact ball bearings
SF: Special single row angular contact ball bearings
DE & DF: Special double row angular contact ball bearings
2. TYPE
3: Double row angular contact ball bearings with filling slot
5: Double row angular contact ball bearings without filling slot
7: Angular contact ball bearings
3. CONTACT ANGLE
No Symbol: Contact Angle 30°
B: Contact angle 40°
C: Contact angle 15°
4. CHAMFER
Xn: Special chamfer, from 1 onward (X1, X2 . . .)
5. CAGE
No Symbol: Standard cage
L1: Machined brass cage
T1: Phenolic cage
T2: Plastic cage, nylon or teflon
6. DUPLEX ARRANGEMENT
DB: Duplex pair, back to back mounting
DF: Duplex pair, face to face mounting
DT: Duplex pair, tandem mounting
G: Single bearings, flush ground universal mount
for DB, DF and DT arrangement
GD2: Pair of universally mountable bearings
+A: Spacer (A is nominal width of spacer in mm)
7. PRELOAD
GL: Light preload
GN: Normal preload
GM: Medium preload
GH: Heavy preload
Gn: Special preload
8. TOLERANCE
٣٣
(Self Aligning Ball Bearing) ‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‬

1. TYPE
1: Standard for self-aligning ball bearings
2: Standard for self-aligning ball bearings
2. CAGE
T2: Plastic cage, nylon or teflon
K: 1:12 tapered bore
CSXX: Special radial clearance;
XX is mean value in 0.001 mm units
(Tapered Roller Bearing) ‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺣﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﻗﺔ‬
٣٤
‫ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ اﻟﺸﻤﺮي‬.‫د‬.‫م‬.‫أ‬ ‫ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﻐﺪﺍﺩ‬/ ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ‬/ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺒﺪﷲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺮﻱ‬.‫ﺩ‬.‫ﻡ‬.‫ﺃ‬
1. PREFIX
ET: NTN Endurance tapered roller bearings, case hardened material
4T: NTN 4-Top tapered roller bearings, case hardened material
E: Case hardened steel
T: Internationally interchangeable dimensions
2. SERIES
H: Heavy
HH: Heavier than heavy
HM: Heavy-medium
L: Light
LM: Light medium
M: Medium
ISO: Metric series 320X, 302, 322, 303 and 323
3. SUFFIX
A: Different bore, O.D., width or radius from basic part number
PK: Class K for J-Line
PXn: Special tolerance, n; from 1 onward
S: Different bore, OD, width or radius from basic part number
U: ISO series; internationally interchangeable through hardened
steel
W: Slot or keyway
X: Different bore, O.D., width or radius from basic part number
-0: AFBMA class 0
-00: AFBMA class 00
-2: AFBMA class 2
٣٥
-3: AFBMA class 3
-4: AFBMA class 4
(Spherical Roller Bearing) ‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﻣﺳﺎﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺣﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻳﺔ‬
1. PREFIX
2. SERIES
21: Standard series spherical roller bearings
3. INTERNAL DESIGN
B: One piece ribbed inner ring, asymmetrical rollers and center
guided retainer
C: Plain inner ring, center floating guide ring (smaller size bearings)
UA: Inner ring without center guide, asymmetrical rollers, and outer
ring center-guided retainer (limited thrust capabilities)
E: High capacity spherical roller bearings
4. CAGE
T2: Nylon cage
D1: Oil groove and holes
K: 1:12 tapered bore
No Suffix: Normal internal clearance
٣٦
CSXX: Special radial clearance; XX is mean value in 0.001 mm units
7. TOLERANCE
No Symbol: Class 0 (equivalent to ABEC 1); standard
PX1: Special tolerance, from 1 onward
V: Special requirement, from 1 onward
VS1: Special tolerance for shaker screen bearings (C3 clearance)
VS2: Special tolerance for shaker screen bearings (C4 clearance)
(Thrust Ball and Roller Bearing) ‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻓﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺣﺭﺟﺔ‬
1. SERIES & SIZE

51, 53*: Single direction thrust ball bearing
52, 54*: Double direction thrust ball bearing
56: Angular contact thrust ball bearing
29: Spherical thrust roller bearing
29: Single direction thrust ball bearing
9: Single direction thrust ball bearing
* Self-aligning outside diameter
2. CAGE
T2: Plastic cage, nylon or Teflon
٣٧
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ‪Fits and Tolerances‬‬

‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﻭﺍﻵﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠ ﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜ ﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺗﺆﺧﺬ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋ ﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣ ﻦ ﻧﻔ ﺲ ﺍﻟﻨ ﻮﻉ ﻭﻭﺿ ﻌﻬﺎ ﺑ ﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻬ ﺎ ﻓ ﻲ ﻣﺎﻛﻨ ﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴ ﺒﺐ ﺫﻟ ﻚ ﺧﻠ ﻞ ﻓ ﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻣﺖ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳ ﻢ ﻓﺄﻧﻬ ﺎ ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻼءﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺇﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎ ً ﻷﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﺇﻧﺘ ﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻘﻴ ﺎﺱ ﻣﻀ ﺒﻮﻁ ﻣﺌ ﺔ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺌ ﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜ ﻮﻥ ﻫﻨ ﺎﻙ ﺍﺧ ﺘﻼﻑ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘ ﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘ ﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻌ ﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻆ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﻠ ﺐ ﺍﻹﻧﺘ ﺎﺝ ﺃﺑﻌ ﺎﺩ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻫﻴ ﺔ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗ ﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻹﻣﻜ ﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻸﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﻨﺤﺮﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻌ ﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻀ ﺒﻮﻁﺔ ﺑﻤﻘ ﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﻠﻴ ﻞ ﻧﺴ ﺒﻴﺎ ً ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴ ﺒﺐ ﺫﻟ ﻚ ﺇﺧ ﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻓ ﻲ ﻭﻅﻴﻔ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺠ ﺰء‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺇﻥ ﻫ ﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻧﺤ ﺮﺍﻑ ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠ ﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳ ﺒﺔ ﻟﻜ ﻞ ﺑﻌ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻭﻅﻴﻔ ﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺼ ﻤﻢ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤ ﺪﺩ ﻣﻘ ﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠ ﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻤﻮﺡ ﻟﻜ ﻞ ﺑﻌ ﺪ ﻋ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻌ ﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟ ﻮﺩ ﻋﻠ ﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻟﻠﺒﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﻩ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻟﻠﺒﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻷﺟﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺣﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘ ﺎﺱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴ ﺎ ً ﺃﺳ ﻬﻞ ﻳﺤ ﺪﺩ ﻣﻘ ﺎﺱ ﻣﻌ ﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ))ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ(( ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺧ ﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺻ ﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻬ ﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺪﻳﻦ ﻋ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘ ﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳ ﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺴ ﻤﻰ ﻣﻘ ﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺠ ﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﻘ ﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺠ ﺰء ﻋ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘ ﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳ ﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺎﺕ‪-:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ )‪ -: (Basic size‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺣﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ )‪ -: (Zero line‬ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺴﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﺍﺗﻔﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ )‪ -: (Limits of size‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﺼ ﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻧ ﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻤﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺠ ﺰء ﺍﻟﻠ ﺬﺍﻥ ﻳﻘ ﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ )‪ -: (Deviation‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ )‪ -: (Upper deviation‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﺒ ﺮﻱ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘ ﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘ ﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ )‪ -: (Lower deviation‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﺒ ﺮﻱ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧ ﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘ ﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘ ﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺤ ﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳ ﻲ )‪ -: (Fundamental deviation‬ﺃﺣ ﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤ ﺮﺍﻓﻴﻦ ﺍﻟ ﺬﻱ ﺗ ﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴ ﺎﺭﻩ‬

‫ﻟﻐ ﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺪﻳ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗ ﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔ ﺎﻭﺕ ﻧﺴ ﺒﺔ ﺇﻟ ﻰ ﺧ ﻂ ﺍﻟﺼ ﻔﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤ ﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳ ﻲ ﻫ ﻮ ﺍﻻﻧﺤ ﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔ ﺎﻭﺕ )‪ -: (Tolerance‬ﺍﻟﻔ ﺮﻕ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘ ﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺤ ﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧ ﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘ ﺎﺱ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻗﻴﻤ ﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔ ﺎﻭﺕ )‪ -: (Tolerance zone‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ﻤﻮﻟﺔ ‪،‬ﻟ ﺪﻯ ﺗﻤﺜﻴ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔ ﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴ ﺎً‪ ،‬ﺑ ﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻤﺜﻼﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻭﺑﻤﻮﻗﻌﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔ ﺎﻭﺕ )‪ -: (Grade of Tolerance‬ﻫ ﻮ ﻣﻘﻴ ﺎﺱ ﻟﻤﻘ ﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔ ﺎﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤ ﺎ ﻛﺎﻧ ﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟ ﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺩﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻼﺣ ﻆ ﺇﻧﻬ ﺎ ﻣﺮﺳ ﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﻴ ﺎﺱ ﻛﺒﻴ ﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻟﻎ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﺗﻘ ﻊ ﺗﺤ ﺖ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻘ ﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳ ﻲ ﻣ ﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺘ ﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺤ ﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠ ﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤ ﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻭﻳﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪-:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴ ﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺴ ﺎﻭﻳﻴﻦ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤ ﺔ ﻭﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔ ﻴﻦ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻹﺷ ﺎﺭﺓ ﻳﻌﻄ ﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ‪-:‬‬
‫‪40±0.125‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺣﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻳﻮﺿﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ‪-:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪ max‬ﺃﻭ ‪ min‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪39.4 min‬‬ ‫‪40.5 max‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬

‫ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻸﻋﻤﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪62f7‬‬ ‫‪40g6‬‬ ‫‪63F8‬‬ ‫‪40H7‬‬
‫)ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ً(‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ -: ١‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪-:‬‬
‫‪+0.073‬‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫‪-0.68‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺱ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺱ = ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ‪ +‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫= ‪ ٨٤٫٠٧٣ = ٠٫٠٧٣ – ٨٤‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺱ = ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ‪ +‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫= ‪ ٨٣٫٨٨٠ = (٠٫١٢٠ -)+ ٨٤‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ = ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺱ – ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺱ‬
‫= ‪٠٫١٩٣ = ٨٣٫٨٨٠ – ٨٤٫٠٧٣‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ -: ٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﺠﺰء ﻫﻮ ‪ ١٢٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﻫﻮ ‪ ١٢٠‬ﻣﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺴ ﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠ ﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤ ﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴ ﻔﻠﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤ ﺖ ﺇﻥ ﻣﻘ ﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔ ﺎﻭﺕ ﻫ ﻮ ‪ . ٨٤µ‬ﺑ ﻴﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴ ﺔ ﻭﺿ ﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ = ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺱ – ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ً ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺱ = ‪ ١١٩٫٩١٦ = ٠٫٠٨٤ – ١٢٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺱ = ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ‪ +‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ً ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ = ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺱ – ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫= ‪ ٠٫٠٨٤ - = ١٢٠ – ١١٩٫٩١٦‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺱ = ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ‪ +‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ً ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ = ‪٠ = ١٢٠ – ١٢٠‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪-:‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪120‬‬
‫‪-0.084‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓ ﻖ )‪ -: (Fit‬ﻋﻨ ﺪﺍ ﻳ ﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﻤﻴ ﻊ ﺟ ﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﻓ ﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻔ ﺮﻕ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺳ ﻴﻬﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒ ﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ))ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ((‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ً‬ ‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺻﻲ )‪ : (Clearance fit‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺧﻠﻮﺻﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ )ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻔ ﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘ ﺐ ﺗﻘ ﻊ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً◌ُ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻲ )‪ : (Transition fit‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗ ﺪ ﻳﻨ ﺘﺞ ﺧﻠﻮﺻ ﺎ ً ﺃﻭ ﺗ ﺪﺍﺧﻼً‪) .‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘ ﻲ ﺗﻔ ﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ )‪ : (Interference fit‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻼ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ‪) .‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺗﻘﻊ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ً ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪ :‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈ ﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓ ﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻘ ﺐ ﺍﻷﺳ ﺎﺱ )‪ : (Hole – basis system of fits‬ﻫ ﻮ ﻧﻈ ﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓ ﻖ ﺍﻟ ﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺼ ﻞ ﻓﻴ ﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺻ ﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘ ﺪﺍﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﺋ ﺘﻼﻑ ﺃﻋﻤ ﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋ ﺔ ﻣ ﻊ ﺛﻘ ﺐ ﻭﺍﺣ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺜﻘ ﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﻪ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈ ﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓ ﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤ ﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺳ ﺎﺱ )‪ : (Shaft – basis system of fits‬ﻫ ﻮ ﻧﻈ ﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓ ﻖ ﺍﻟ ﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺻﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘ ﺪﺍﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﺋ ﺘﻼﻑ ﺛﻘ ﻮﺏ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋ ﺔ ﻣ ﻊ ﻋﻤ ﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤ ﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﻪ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪+٠٫٠٦٥‬‬ ‫‪+٠٫٢٣٥‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪١‬‬

‫‪١٦٠‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻤﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪160‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﺐ ﻫﻮ‬
‫‪٠‬‬ ‫‪+٠٫١٢٥‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻫﻮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‪-:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ = ‪ ١٦٠٫٢٣٥ = ٠٫٢٣٥ + ١٦٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ = ‪ ١٦٠٫١٢٠ = ٠٫١٢٠ + ١٦٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ = ‪ ١٦٠٫٠٦٥ = ٠٫٠٦٥ + ١٦٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪١٦٠ = ٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ = ‪+ ١٦٠‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺻ ﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤ ﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺧﻠﻮﺻﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺹ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ = ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ – ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ‬
‫= ‪ ٠٫٢٣٥ = ١٦٠ – ١٦٠٫٢٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺹ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ = ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ – ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‬
‫= ‪ ٠٫٠٥٥ = ١٦٠٫٠٦٥ – ١٦٠٫١٢٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﻘﺐ ﻭﻋﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻬﻤﺎ ‪ ٦٨‬ﻣ ﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘ ﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻋﻠ ﻰ ‪-١٩٠µ‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻫﻮ ‪. -٥٥µ‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤ ﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴ ﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺜﻘ ﺐ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤ ﺖ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤ ﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠ ﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤ ﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﺎ ‪ +١٩٠µ‬ﻭ ‪ +١٣٠µ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‪-:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ = ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ – ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ً ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ = ‪٦٨ = (٠٫١٩٠-) + ٦٨٫١٩٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ = ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ‪ +‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ً ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﺐ = ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ – ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫= ‪٠ = ٦٨ – ٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ = ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ – ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ً ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ = ‪ ٦٨٫٠٧٥ = (٠٫٠٥٥-)+ ٦٨٫١٣‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ = ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ‪ +‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﺐ = ‪ ٠٧٥. = ٦٨٫٠٠٠ – ٦٨٫٠٧٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺒ ﻴﻦ ﻣﺴ ﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻ ﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳ ﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻗﻴ ﺔ )‪ (١٢٣٣‬ﻧﻈ ﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺪﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘ ﺎﺕ ﻭﻫ ﻲ ﻣﻮﺿ ﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ )‪. (ISO 276‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻ ﻔﺔ ﺟﻤﻴ ﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳ ﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﺎ ً ﻭﺗﺸ ﻤﻞ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ‪ ١٨‬ﺩﺭﺟ ﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻔ ﺎﻭﺕ ﻭﺗﻈ ﻢ ‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎ ً ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎ ً ﻟﻠﺜﻘﺐ ﻭ ‪ ٢٨‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎ ً ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎ ً ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ )‪(Grade of tolerance‬‬

‫ﺗﺪﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘ ﺎﺝ ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼ ﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﻌﻨ ﻲ ﺩﻗ ﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ‪ ١٨‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪١٦ ، ١٥ ، ١٤ ، ١٣ ، ١٢ ، ١١ ، ١٠ ، ٩ ، ٨ ، ٧ ، ٦ ، ٥ ، ٤ ، ٣ ، ٢ ، ١ ، ٠ ، ٠١‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠١‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺗﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٦‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺗﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻭﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١١‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ١٦‬ﺗﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔ ﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴ ﺒﺔ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﻋ ﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ) ﻣ ﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟ ﻰ ‪ .( ١٣‬ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟ ﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒ ﺮ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟ ﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘ ﺔ ﻭﻛﻤ ﺎ ﻣﻮﺿ ﺢ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺸ ﻜﻞ ﻓ ﺄﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻗﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ )ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ(‬

‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧ ﻂ ﺍﻟﺼ ﻔﺮ ﻭﻳ ﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺧ ﻂ ﺍﻟﺼ ﻔﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫ ﻮ ﺍﻻﻧﺤ ﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻗ ﺮﺏ ﺍﻟ ﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ )ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ(‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ‪ ٢٨‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎ ً ﺃﺳﺎﺳ ﻴﺎ ً ﻟﻠﺜﻘ ﺐ ﻭﻛ ﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﻌﻤ ﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﻣ ﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺍﻵﻧﺤ ﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳ ﻲ ﺑﺤ ﺮﻑ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴ ﺔ ﻭﺗﺴ ﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴ ﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺜﻘ ﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻸﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪-:‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺜﻘﻮﺏ‪-:‬‬
‫‪A, B, C, CD, D, E, EF, F, FG, G, H, JS, J, K, M, N, P, R, S, T, U, V, X,‬‬
‫‪Y, Z, ZA, ZB, ZC‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻮﺩ‪-:‬‬
‫‪a, b, c, cd, d, e, ef ,f ,fg , g, h, js, j, k, m, n, p, r, s, t, u, v, x, y, z, za, zb, zc‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ G‬ﺛﻘﻮﺏ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻌﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﻄﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘ ﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳ ﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ً ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎً‪ .‬ﻳﺴ ﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺮﻑ ‪ H‬ﻟﻠﺜﻘ ﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﻳﻜ ﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎ ً ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫ ﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟ ﺔ ﻳﺼ ﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧ ﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘ ﺎﺱ ﻣﺴ ﺎﻭﻳﺎ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘ ﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳ ﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤ ﺎ ﺗﺒﺘﻌ ﺪ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺮﻭﻑ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺮﻑ ‪ H‬ﺗﺼ ﻐﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳ ﻴﺔ ﻋ ﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪-:‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﻳﺴ ﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﻤ ﻮﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻣ ﺎ ً ﻣﺸ ﺎﺑﻬﺎ ً ﻟﻤ ﺎ ﺍﺳ ﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻠﺜﻘ ﺐ ﺍﻻ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺷ ﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻜ ﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳ ﺔ ﺣﻴ ﺚ ﺗ ﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤ ﺮﻭﻑ ﻣ ﻦ ‪ a‬ﺍﻟ ﻰ ‪ g‬ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺃﻋﻤ ﺪﺓ ﺗﻜ ﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬ ﺎ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳ ﻴﺔ ﺳ ﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺗﻜ ﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﻄﺎﺭﻫ ﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺮﻑ ‪ h‬ﻳﻜ ﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤ ﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳ ﻲ ﻣﺴ ﺎﻭﻳﺎ ً ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺍﻟﺼ ﻔﺮ ﺣﻴ ﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎ ً ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ h‬ﻓﺘ ﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪-:‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻓﺄﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﻭ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻭﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔ ﺎﻭﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺫﻟ ﻚ ﻳﻨ ﺘﺞ ﻋ ﺪﺩ ﻫﺎﺋ ﻞ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗ ﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺗ ﺐ ﻋ ﺎﺩﺓ ﻓ ﻲ ﺟ ﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺧﺎﺻ ﺔ ﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻻ ﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳ ﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺤﺴ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺤ ﻆ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬ ﺎ ﺑﺠ ﺰء‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ – ‪ ١‬ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘ ﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺜﻘ ﺐ ﻭﻳﺒ ﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠ ﺪﻭﻝ – ‪ ٢‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗ ﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(ISO 1829‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻄ ﻲ ﻫ ﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺠ ﺪﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺣ ﺪﻱ ﺍﻻﻧﺤ ﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻧ ﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴ ﺒﺔ ﻟ ﺒﻌﺾ ﺭﻣ ﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻔ ﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘ ﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪ISO‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻴ ﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳ ﺐ ﻟﺘﻔ ﺎﻭﺕ ﻛ ﻞ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻘ ﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤ ﻮﺩ ﻣ ﻦ ﺟ ﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗ ﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼ ﻮﻝ ﻋﻠ ﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻷﺳ ﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ً ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‪ .‬ﻷﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴ ﺮ ﻗﻄ ﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎ ً ﺃﺳﻬﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓ ﻲ ﻧﻈ ﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓ ﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻘ ﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳ ﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤ ﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴ ﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺜﻘ ﺐ ﺻ ﻔﺮ ﻭﻳﻜ ﻮﻥ ﺭﻣ ﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔ ﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺜﻘﺐ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ ، H‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻤ ﻮﺩ ﺻ ﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪.h‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ – ‪١‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ – ‪٢‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ – ١‬ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ – ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫‪H11/c11 H9/d9 H9/c8 H8/f7 H7/g6‬‬
‫‪H7/h6‬‬ ‫‪H7/k6 H7/n6 H7/p6 H7/s6‬‬
‫‪ – ٢‬ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ – ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫‪C11/h11 D10/h9 E9/h8 F8/h7 G7/h6‬‬
‫‪H7/h6‬‬ ‫‪K7/h6 N7/h6 P7/h6 S7/h6‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬

‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺈﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻟﻜﻼ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء‬
‫ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ً ﺑﺄﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﺃﻭﻻً‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪45 H8/g7 :‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪45 H8 – g7‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ = ‪ ٤٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ – ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ )ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪(H‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ 45g6‬؟‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﻫﻮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ )ﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ = ‪ ٤٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ = ‪ ٩ -‬ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ = ‪ ٢٥ -‬ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ = ‪٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ 120H7‬؟‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﻫﻮ ﺛﻘﺐ )ﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ = ‪ ١٢٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﻘﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ )ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪(H‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ = ‪٢٥ µ‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ = ‪٠‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ = ‪٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻫﻮ ‪ 80D10‬ﺟﺪ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء = ﺛﻘﺐ )ﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ = ‪+٢٢٠µ‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ = ‪+١٠٠µ‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺱ = ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ‪ +‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫= ‪ ٨٠٫٢٢٠ = ٠٫٢٢٠ + ٨٠٫٠٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺱ = ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ‪ +‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫= ‪ ٨٠٫١٠٠ = ٠٫١٠٠ + ٨٠٫٠٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﻘـــﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔـــــﺎﻭﺕ = ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺱ – ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺱ‬
‫= ‪ ٠٫١٢٠ = ٨٠٫١٠٠ – ٨٠٫٢٢٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﻬﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪80 H8/k6 -٣‬‬ ‫‪52 R7/h6 -٢‬‬ ‫‪20 H9/e8 -١‬‬
‫ﺟﺪ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺭﺗﺐ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫‪ (a‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫‪ (b‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫‪ (c‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ (d‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ (e‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ (f‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫‪ (g‬ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺹ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫‪ (h‬ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺹ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬
‫‪ (i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ (j‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ‪١‬‬
‫‪ (a‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪ :‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ )ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‪(H‬‬
‫‪ (b‬ﻟﻠﺜﻘﺐ ‪ ، 20H9‬ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻮﺩ ‪20e8‬‬
‫‪ (c‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﺐ = ‪ ٠٫٠٥٢ +‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﺐ = ‪٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻮﺩ = ‪ ٠٫٠٤٠ -‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻮﺩ = ‪ ٠٫٠٧٣ -‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ (d‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ = ‪ ٢٠٫٠٥٢ = ٠٫٠٥٢ + ٢٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ = ‪ ٢٠٫٠٠٠ = ٠ + ٢٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ = ‪ ١٩٫٩٦٠ = (٠٫٠٤٠-) + ٢٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ = ‪ ١٩٫٩٢٧ = (٠٫٠٧٣ -) + ٢٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ (e‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ = ‪ ٠٫٠٥٢ = ٢٠٫٠٠٠ – ٢٠٫٠٥٢‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ (f‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ = ‪ ٠٫٠٣٣ = ١٩٫٩٢٧ – ١٩٫٩٦٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ (g‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ = ﺧﻠﻮﺻﻲ‬
‫‪ (h‬ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺹ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ = ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ – ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‬
‫= ‪ ٠٫١٢٥ = ١٩٫٩٢٧ – ٢٠٫٠٥٢‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ (i‬ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺹ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ = ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ – ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‬
‫= ‪ ٠٫٠٤٠ = ١٩٫٩٦٠ – ٢٠٫٠٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ (j‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ‪µ‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ‪µ‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ‪µ‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫‪µ‬‬ ‫‪µ‬‬ ‫‪µ‬‬ ‫‪µ‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻢ(‬
‫)ﻣﻢ(‬ ‫)ﻣﻢ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪52‬‬ ‫‪20.000‬‬ ‫‪20.052‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪+ 52‬‬ ‫‪20H9‬‬ ‫ﺛﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺛﻘﺐ‬

‫‪-----‬‬ ‫‪-----‬‬ ‫‪+40‬‬ ‫‪+125‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻮﺻﻲ‬ ‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪19.927‬‬ ‫‪19.960‬‬ ‫‪- 73‬‬ ‫‪- 40‬‬ ‫‪20e8‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪51.940‬‬ ‫‪51.970‬‬ ‫‪- 60‬‬ ‫‪- 30‬‬ ‫‪52R7‬‬ ‫ﺛﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩ‬
‫‪-11‬‬ ‫‪-60‬‬ ‫‪-----‬‬ ‫‪-----‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪٥٢‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪51.981‬‬ ‫‪52.000‬‬ ‫‪- 19‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪52h6‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪80.000‬‬ ‫‪80.046‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪+ 46‬‬ ‫‪80H8‬‬ ‫ﺛﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺛﻘﺐ‬
‫‪-----‬‬ ‫‪-21‬‬ ‫‪-----‬‬ ‫‪+44‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪٨٠‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪80.002 80.021‬‬ ‫‪+2‬‬ ‫‪+ 21‬‬ ‫‪80k6‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬
‫)‪ (Housing‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻧﺰﻻﻕ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ )ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ً ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺣﻒ( ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻼﺻﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺎﻷﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ )‪ (Radial‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻱ )‪ (axial‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺣﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺿﺮﺭﺍ ً ﻟﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻭﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻭﻟﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻚ )‪ (Abrasive wear‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺰﻭﺯ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻜﺸﻮﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻧﺰﻻﻕ‬
‫ﻻﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻭﺑﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺪﻭﺩ )‪ (tight fit‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻻﻧﻜﻤﺎﺷﻲ‬
‫)‪.(shrink fit‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺪﻭﺩ )‪ (tight fit‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬

‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪-:‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻞ ﺳﺎﻛﻨﺎ ً ﺃﻡ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻸﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺪﻭﺩ ﺃﻣﺎ ﻟﻸﺣﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺻﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍ ً ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ً ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﺪﺓ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺭﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺋﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺪﻭﺩ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻧﻬﻢ ﻳﺴﺒﺒﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺻﻌﺒﺎ ً ﺟﺪﺍ ً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻖ ) ‪Deep‬‬
‫‪ (Groove Ball Bearings‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺸﺪﻭﺩ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺣﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺧﻠﻮﺻﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬

‫ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﻧﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻜﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻁﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٦‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ(‬
‫‪ -٧‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٨‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺰﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ -١‬ﻳﺼﺪﺃ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺟﺪﺍ ً ﻟﻸﻭﺳﺎﺥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺎ‪ً.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺗﻐﻠﻐﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺛﺎﺕ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٦‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻳﺪﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٧‬ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٨‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺻﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻀﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺷﻜﻼً ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬

‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﻭﺯﻧﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻬﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻧﻬﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﻭﺯﻧﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬

‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬ ﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻭﺯﻧ ﻚ ﺧﺎﻟﻴ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺨ ﺪﻭﺵ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﺘ ﻮء ﻭﺃﻭﺳ ﺎﺥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻘﺎﻳ ﺎ ﺭﻣ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺴ ﺒﺎﻛﺔ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻭﺯﻧ ﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺍﺯﺍﻟ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺨ ﺪﻭﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘ ﻮءﺍﺕ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﺟ ﺪﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺘ ﻰ ﻟ ﻮ ﻛﺎﻧ ﺖ ﺻ ﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺟ ﺪﺍ ً ﺑﺎﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺣﺠ ﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺘﻴ ﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺗﻨﻌ ﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴ ﻖ‪ .‬ﺑﻌ ﺪ ﺫﻟ ﻚ ﻳ ﺘﻢ ﻁ ﻼء‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺯﻳﺖ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺪﻭﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‬

‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀ ﻐﻂ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴ ﺔ ﻋﻨ ﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴ ﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻭﺯﻧ ﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺗﺠﻨ ﺐ ﺍﺟ ﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻜ ﺲ ﻷﻧ ﻪ ﺳ ﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﻓﺸ ﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻻً ﺃﻭ ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ً ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻀﺮﺭ ﻣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬

‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻂ ﻗﻮﻯ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻭﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺟﻬ ﺔ ﻭﺍﺣ ﺪﺓ ﺣﻴ ﺚ‬
‫ﺫﻟ ﻚ ﺳ ﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺍﺿ ﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﺴ ﻠﻂ ﺍﻟﻘ ﻮﻯ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴ ﺎ ً ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻔ ﺺ )‪ (Retainer‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺘ ﺎﻡ‬
‫)‪.(Seals‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻄﺮﻗﺔ ﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻄﺮﻗﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄ ﺮﻕ ﻋﻠ ﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺑﺼ ﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷ ﺮﺓ ﺣﻴ ﺚ ﺍﻥ ﺫﻟ ﻚ ﺳ ﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺍﺿ ﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺍﻟﻀ ﺮﺏ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻋ ﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎ ً‬

‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛ ﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠ ﻮﺏ ﺗﺜﺒﻴ ﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴ ﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴ ﺔ ﻣﻌ ﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻓ ﻖ ﺗ ﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ )‪(Interference Fit‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻ ﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﺤﻴ ﺚ ﺗﻐﻄ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺘ ﻴﻦ ﻣﻌ ﺎ ً ﻛﻤ ﺎ ﻣﺒ ﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈ ﺎﻡ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻛ ﻼ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺘ ﻴﻦ ﻓ ﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣ ﺪ ﺃﻡ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗ ﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴ ﻠﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺿﺮﺭﺍ ً ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺖ ﻣﻌ ﺪﻧﻲ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺩﺭﺟ ﺔ ﺣ ﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺍﻟ ﻰ ‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﺭﺟ ﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳ ﺔ‪ .‬ﻫ ﺬﺍ ﺳ ﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺗﻮﺳ ﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄ ﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻭﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴ ﺨﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﻘ ﺎ ً ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺍﻟ ﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻷﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻼﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻠﻴ ﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺣﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻋﻤﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﺨ ﻞ )ﻣﺸ ﺒﻚ(‪ ،‬ﻻﺗﻀ ﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻳﻼﻣ ﺲ ﻗ ﺎﻉ ﻭﻋ ﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻨ ﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻞ ﺩﺭﺟ ﺔ ﺣ ﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺍﻝ ‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﺭﺟ ﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗ ﻞ ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺜﺒ ﺖ ﻓ ﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧ ﻪ ﺑﺴ ﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺳ ﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻘﻠﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺮﺩ ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺠﻮﺓ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻴ ﺔ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ﻛﺘ ﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺣﻴﻨﻬ ﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬
‫‪-5‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻲ ) ‪.(1.25x10‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻫﻮ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻣﺘﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ‪ ١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ‪١٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻗﻄﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ )ﺍﻟﻜُﻢ(‬

‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﺄﻥ ﻭﺻ ﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟ ُﻜ ﻢ )‪ (Adapter Sleeve‬ﻻﺗﺤﺘ ﺎﺝ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴ ﻒ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﻠ ﻮﻝ ﻓﻘ ﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻢ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺼ ﺪﺃ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﻗﻄﻌ ﺔ ﻗﻤ ﺎﺵ ﻧﻈﻴﻔ ﺔ ﻗﺒ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴ ﺐ‪ .‬ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴ ﺐ ﺍﻟﻜ ﻢ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺒﺔ( ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻁﻼء ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻢ )‪ (Sleeve‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺯﻳﺖ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﺛ ﻢ ﻳ ﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻓ ﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻜ ﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﻣﻔ ﻚ ﻟﺘﺴ ﻬﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟ ﻪ‪ .‬ﺛ ﻢ ﻳ ﺘﻢ ﻗﻴ ﺎﺱ ﻣﻘ ﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠ ﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠ ﻮﺏ ﻟﻴ ﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺪ ﻗﺒ ﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺻ ﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺠﻤﻴ ﻊ ﻣ ﺮﻳﺢ ﺟ ﺪﺍ ً ﻷﻧ ﻪ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺴ ﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻌ ﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣ ﺎﻝ ﻓﻤ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺼ ﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺿ ﻌﻪ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜ ﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻀ ﺒﻮﻁ ﺟ ﺪﺍً‪ .‬ﺃﻣ ﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛ ﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺣﺮﺝ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﻚ ﺣﻴ ﺚ ﺳﺘﺴ ﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴ ﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺑﺴ ﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺛ ﻢ ﻳ ﺘﻢ ﺯﻧ ﻖ‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ ً ﻣ ﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺑﺼ ﻮﺭﺓ ﺻ ﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳ ﻚ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﻻ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻓﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻧﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗ ﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴ ﺔ ﺯﻧ ﻖ ﺍﻟﺼ ﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺘ ﺎﺡ ﺭﺑ ﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﻣﻄﺮﻗ ﺔ ﻣ ﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴ ﺐ ﻣ ﻊ ﻓﺤ ﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠ ﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻄ ﺮﻱ ﺑﺘﻜ ﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﻣﻘﻴ ﺎﺱ ﺳ ﻤﻚ )‪ .(thickness gage‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴ ﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠ ﻮﺹ ﺗﺼ ﻞ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺍﻟ ﻰ ‪%٦٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺹ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺗﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼ ﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺤﻴ ﺚ ﻳﺼ ﺒﺢ ﺃﺧ ﺪﻭﺩ ﻟﺴ ﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼ ﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻊ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬

‫‪ -١‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴ ﺔ ﻋﻨ ﺪ ﺍﺯﺍﻟ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺴ ﻠﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻘ ﻮﺓ ﻋﻠ ﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻭﺯﻧﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺲ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )‪(Hand Press‬‬

‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺴﺐ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻷﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻴ ﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻌﻨ ﺪ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻜ ﺒﺲ ﺑ ﺄﻥ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻣﺤ ﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜ ﺒﺲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄ ﺎﺑﻖ ﻣ ﻊ ﻣﺮﻛ ﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴ ﺔ ﻣﺴ ﻨﺪﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﺻ ﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﺳ ﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧ ﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﺗﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺳ ﻮﻑ ﺗﺴ ﻠﻂ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴ ﺔ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻁﻌﺠﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ( ﻭﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻥ ﻣﺮﻥ‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺳﺤﺐ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﻣﻌ ﺪﻥ ﻣ ﺮﻥ )‪ (soft metal‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳ ﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻄﺮﻗﺔ ﺣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺮﻧﺔ‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻄﺮﻗﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﻣ ﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺮﻧ ﺔ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳ ﺔ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭ ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ )‪(Assembly Adapter‬‬

‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺠﻤﻴ ﻊ ﺗﺮﻓ ﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳ ﻜﺎﺕ ﺑ ﺎﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﻴ ﺚ ﻳﻮﺿ ﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳ ﻚ ﺑﺘﻤ ﺎﺱ ﻣ ﻊ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧ ﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴ ﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻓﻴﺮﻓ ﻊ ﻟﺴ ﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺷ ﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺗﺨ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺼ ﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﻟ ﺪﻭﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻼﺛ ﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿ ﻊ ﺣﺸ ﻮﺓ ﻣ ﻦ ﻣ ﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺮﻧ ﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺑ ﻞ ﺟﺎﻧ ﺐ ﺍﻟﺼ ﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺛ ﻢ ﺗﻀ ﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺸ ﻮﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮﻗ ﺔ‬
‫ﻷﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﻢ )‪ (Sleeve‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻓﺄﺫﺍ ﺗﺤ ﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜ ﻢ ﻓ ﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺳ ﻮﻑ ﻳﺨ ﺮﺝ ﺑﺴ ﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗ ﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺍ ً ﻭﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ً ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺸ ﻴﻖ ﻣ ﻊ ﺍﻟﻜ ﻢ ﻓﻤ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤ ﻞ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻀﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ – ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ‬

‫ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻭﻳ ﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔ ﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴ ﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻟ ﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴ ﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻬ ﺎﺋﻲ ﻣ ﻊ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﻫ ﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﻣﺸ ﺒﻚ‬
‫)ﻣﻨﺨﻞ( ﻷﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛ ﻼ ﺍﻟﺨﻄ ﻮﺗﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈ ﺔ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺸ ﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧ ﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻟ ﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟ ﻨﻔﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑ ﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴ ﻒ ﻣﻨﺎﺳ ﺐ ﺟ ﺪﺍ ً ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴ ﻒ ﺃﻣ ﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛ ﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻭﺳ ﺦ ﺟ ﺪﺍ ً ﻓﻤ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜ ﺎﺯﻭﻟﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳ ﺔ ﺃﺛﻨ ﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴ ﻒ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜ ﺎﺯﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﻨﺒ ﺎ ً ﻟﺤ ﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻷﺷ ﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻭﻛ ﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨ ﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ )‪(Rough Cleaning‬‬

‫ً‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴ ﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛ ﺎﻥ ﻭﺳ ﺨﺎ ﻋﻨ ﺪ ﻏﻤ ﺮﻩ ﺑﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴ ﻒ ﻷﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺪﺵ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻣﻐﻤﻮﺭﺍ ً ﺣﺘ ﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﺼ ﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺳ ﺎﺥ ﻣﻨ ﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗ ﻢ ﺗﺴ ﺨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﻓﺄﻧ ﻪ ﺳ ﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﻈ ﻒ ﺑﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴ ﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺃﻳ ﺔ ﺣ ﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺴ ﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺃﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻣ ﻦ ‪١٢٠‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ )‪(Final Cleaning‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺤﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳ ﺨﺔ ﺑﺨﻄ ﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴ ﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻟ ﻲ ﻳﻮﺿ ﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﻭﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴ ﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﺮ ﺗﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌ ﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴ ﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻁﻼء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺣﺎﻣﻲ ﺻﺪﺃ ﻭﻳﻠﻒ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬

‫ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﺄﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺑﺄﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻁﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺟﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺧﺸﺒﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺗﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﻻ ﺗﻜﺪﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻷﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺼﺮ ﻭﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ وإزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ اﻟﻜﺮوﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴ ﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻓ ﻲ‬
‫ﺣ ﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓ ﻖ ﺍﻷﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳ ﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻤﻨ ﻊ ﺗﻀ ﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴ ﻠﻂ ﻗ ﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴ ﺖ ﺩﺍﺋﻤ ﺎ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎ ً ﻣﺸﺪﻭﺩﺍً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺜﺒ ﺖ ﻓ ﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬ ﺎ ﻋ ﻦ ﻁﺮﻳ ﻖ ﻁ ﺮﻕ ﺟﻠﺒ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴ ﺐ‬
‫)‪ (Mounting Sleeve‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﻣﻄﺮﻗ ﺔ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴ ﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﻫ ﺬﺍ ﻳﻤﻨ ﻊ ﻗ ﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄ ﺮﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣ ﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻘ ﻞ ﺑﺼ ﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷ ﺮﺓ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻ ﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟ ﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟ ﻖ )‪ (Raceway‬ﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺿ ﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻟ ﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘ ﺔ ﺗﻀ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘ ﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳ ﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘ ﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺍﻳﻀ ﺎ ً ﺃﺛﻨ ﺎء ﺍﺯﺍﻟ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻣ ﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻧ ﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗ ﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟ ﺔ ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﻂ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ )ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﻭﻁﻴﺔ(‬

‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻕ )ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﻭﻁﻲ( ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺪﻭﺩ ) ‪Tight‬‬
‫‪ .(Fit‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﻠﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ً ﺟﺪﺍً‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻠﻮﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺻﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺯﻧﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ )‪(Shafts‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ )‪ (Adapter Sleeve‬ﻭﺟﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ )‪ (Extraction Sleeves‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻗﻲ )‪.(Socket Wrench‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ‬

‫‪Mounting Tool Set FITTING.TOOL.ALU.SET10-50 for Cylindrical Bearing‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺣﻼً ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎ ً ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻻً ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٣٣‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺑﻮﺵ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ) ‪Mounting‬‬
‫‪ (Sleeve‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻄﺮﻗﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‪ .‬ﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻁ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻤﻨﻴﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮﻗﺔ ﻳﺰﻥ ﻭﺣﺪ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻏﺮﺍﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٢٢٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ‬

‫‪Mounting Tool Set FITTING.TOOL.STEEL.SET10-50 for Cylindrical Bearing‬‬
‫‪Seats‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺻﻤﻤﺖ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ )‪(Rolling Bearing‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺍﻝ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻳﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٣‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺼﻠﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺟﻠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ )‪(Mounting Sleeve‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻮﻻﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺗﺪﺍﺩﻳﺔ ﻳﺰﻥ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻋﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻠﻮﻏﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٢٢٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ‬

‫‪socket wrenches LOCKNUT.SOCKET...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺩﻭﻗﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﻗﺔ ) ‪Socket wrenches for tapered bearing‬‬
‫‪(seats‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺻﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻧﻖ )‪ (Lock Nut‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬

‫‪ KM0‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ KM20‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺧﺎﺋﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫)‪ (adapter sleeve‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻓﺮﺍﻏﺎ ً ﻗﻠﻴﻼً ﺟﺪﺍ ً‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ )‪ (nut‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺎﻑ( ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻓﺄﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺆﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﻭﺍﺷﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﻁﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻘﺐ ﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺪﻭﺩ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻁﻲ‪. .‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻘﻮﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻌﺪ‬

‫‪Hook Wrenches for Tapered Bearing Seats LOCKNUT.HOOK...‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻘﻮﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺑﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺑﻮﺵ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻷﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻮﺵ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺍﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻘﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻗﺔ‬

‫‪Joined hook wrenches for tapered bearing seats LOCKNUT.FLEXI-HOOK...‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﺷﺩ ﻭﺇﺭﺧﺎء ﺻﻭﺍﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ‪ KM...‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺍﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫…‪ LNPG‬ﻭ …‪ ZM‬ﻭ ‪ ZMA..‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﺭ ﻭﺑﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺑﻭﺵ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺯﻭﻡ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺻﻭﺍﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﻷﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ordering example for FAG jointed hook wrench, suitable for‬‬
‫‪locknuts KM14 to KM24: LOCKNUT.FLEXI-HOOK.KM14-24‬‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻘﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻗﺔ‬

‫‪Joined pin wrenches for tapered bearing seats LOCKNUT.FLEXI-PIN...‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﺸﺪ ﻭﺇﺭﺧﺎء ﺻﻮﺍﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ AM15‬ﻭ ‪ AM90‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻭﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ordering example for FAG jointed pin wrench, suitable for‬‬
‫‪locknuts‬‬
‫‪AM35 to AM60: LOCKNUT.FLEXI-PIN.AM35-60‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﻗﺔ‬

‫‪Jointed Face Wrenches for tapered bearing seats‬‬
‫…‪LOCKNUT.FACE-PIN‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﺸﺪ ﻭﻓﻚ ﺻﻮﺍﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ LNP017‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ LNP170‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻘﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪face wrench, suitable for Ordering example for FAG jointed‬‬
‫‪precision‬‬
‫‪locknuts LNP017 to LPN025: LOCKNUT.FACE-PIN.LNP17-25‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ‬

‫‪Double Hook Wrenches for tapered bearing seats‬‬
‫‪LOCKNUT.DOUBLEHOOK...KIT‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﺷﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻧﺩ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ‪ self aligning ball bearing‬ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﻕ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺓ ﺗﺗﺄﻟﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻭﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻭﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺑﻌﺩﻫﺎ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺄﻟﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻳﺿﺎً‪ .‬ﻛﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﻁﺑﻭﻉ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻁﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻋﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫‪Two-Arm Extractor 54 for small bearings‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻷﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺪﻭﺩ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ .‬ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺫﺭﻉ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﺫﺭﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﺰﻻﻕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺮﺟﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻻﺗﺘﻀﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪(Extractor 57) ٤٧‬‬
‫‪Extractor 47‬‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ‪ ٥٢‬ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺫﺭﻉ )‪(Extractor52‬‬
‫‪Three – Arm Extractor 52‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ )‪(Hydraulic Pressure tool‬‬

‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺪﻭﺩ ﺳﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻗﻮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٨٠‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ١٥٠‬ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ )‪ ،(extractor spindle‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺐ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺧﺬ ﺑﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫‪Mechanical‬‬ ‫‪internal‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺘﺨﺮﺝ )ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﻠ ﻊ( ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜ ﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟ ﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺼ ﻐﻴﺮﺓ )‬
‫‪(Extractor‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪-:‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﻷﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧ ﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴ ﻖ )‪ (Deep Groove Ball Bearings‬ﻭﻛ ﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻱ )‪ .(Angular Contact Ball Bearings‬ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﺗﺴ ﻌﺔ ﺃﺟ ﺰﺍء‬
‫ﻭﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ٧٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻄﺮﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﺍﻥ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻊ ﻣﺴ ﻠﻄﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﺧ ﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻ ﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟ ﺔ ﻓ ﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻀ ﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺻ ﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎءﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﻳﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻲ ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺷﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﻮﻙ ﺗﻜ ﻮﻥ ﺧﻠ ﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴ ﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻛﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫‪٩٤‬‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫‪٩٨‬‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻭﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﻁﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎ ً ﻁﺒﻘﺎ ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻛﻤﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻟﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ً ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎ ً ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ً ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪-:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺎ ً ﺑﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻁﺒﻘﺎ ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪-:‬‬
‫‪(Dm . n) / 2‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ‪ Dm‬ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻠﻜﺮﺳﻲ )ﻣﻢ(‬
‫‪ n‬ﻫﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺳﻲ )ﻟﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Dm . n‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬

‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻸ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺛﻠﺚ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻍ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﺷﺤﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪٣٠٠،٠٠٠‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻢ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﺷﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٠٠،٠٠٠‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﺸﺤﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‬
‫‪٩٠٠،٠٠٠‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٠٠،٠٠٠‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﺯﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫‪١،٥٠٠،٠٠٠‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺯﻳﺖ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪١،٥٠٠،٠٠٠‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ )‪(Selection of Grease or Oil‬‬

‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴ ﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺤﻢ ﻛﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺗﺰﻳﻴ ﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳ ﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻳﻌﺘﻤ ﺪ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻋ ﺪﺓ ﻋﻮﺍﻣ ﻞ ﻟﻜﻨ ﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ً ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘ ﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻨ ﻪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠ ﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﻣﺴ ﺎﻭﺉ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﻫ ﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺼ ﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﻨ ﺔ ﺑﻨﻈ ﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﻘﺪ ﺟﺪﺍ ً ﻭﻣﻜﻠﻒ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻷﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪-:‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪-:‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻉ ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ‪ً.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎ ً ﻭﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٢‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪-:‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻁﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺪﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﻧﻊ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺤﻮﻡ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻁﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﻮﺍﺻﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻸﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﻠﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟ ﺬﻱ ﻳﺰﻳ ﺪ ﻣ ﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻣ ﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺘﻜ ﺎﻙ ﻭﻳ ﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺃﺳ ﻄﺢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜ ﺎﻙ ﻭﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻧ ﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻭﻳﺘﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻁﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺳﻲ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻪ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﻟﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻭﺍﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺳﻲ ﺟﻴﺪﺍ ً‬
‫ﺑﺄﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﺮﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻁ ﺧﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﺍﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ً‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺺ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻌﺎﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺳﻲ ﻓﺄﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺮﺳﻲ )ﻛﺄﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻮ ﻣﺜﻼً( ﻓﺄﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺷﻬﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺷﻬﺮ ﺍﻻ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺎ ً ﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺤﻮﻡ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻮﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﺎﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﺎءﺍ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺓ ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻮﻡ ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪-:‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺠﻤﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻓﻴﻌﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ً ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺷﺤﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻟﺴﻴﻮﻡ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺎء ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ % ٣‬ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺑﻮﻥ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﺄﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺷﺤﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻟﺴﻴﻮﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ً ﺷﺤﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ١٥٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺤﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ً ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺩﻳﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻷﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﺃ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﻳﻘﺎﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻁﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﻳﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻢ ﺫﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻟﺴﻴﻮﻡ ﻓﻬﻮ ﻻ ﻳﻤﺘﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﺃ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻸﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺤﻢ ﺫﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻟﺴﻴﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﺎﺹ ﻟﻴﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﻻﻳﺬﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﻠﺘﺼﻖ ﻭﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺟﻴﺪﺍ ً ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻪ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﺃ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻁﻮﺑﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎﻛﻨﺎﺕ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﻛﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻓﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻮﺍﺹ ﻭﻅﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﻳﺔ‬

‫‪ -١‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ %(٣-١‬ﻣﺎء‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﻳﻨﻔﺼﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺑﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻟﺴﻴﻮﻡ‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ -١‬ﻳﻤﺘﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﺃ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺼﻔﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺩﻳﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪١٢٠‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﻳﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻁﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎء‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ‬
‫– ‪ ٣٠‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪١٥٠‬‬
‫‪EP‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﻻ ﻳﺬﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻟﺴﻴﻮﻡ‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﻳﻠﺘﺼﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻄﻮﺡ ﻭﻳﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻁﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﺃ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٠٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪١٠٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ )ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻁﺒﻘﺔ ﺯﻳﺖ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪ( ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ً ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻁﺒﻘﺔ ﺯﻳﺖ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺰﻳﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺟﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺰﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻅﺎﻫﺮﺓ ‪ . Smearing‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺯﻳﻮﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺰﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻟﻸﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ Oil Path Lubrication -١‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻁﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺪﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎ ً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﺰﻳﺖ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻳﻐﻤﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ %٥٠‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ %٨٠‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٥‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺭﺵ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ‪Oil Splash‬‬

‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻻﻳﻐﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻫﻨ ﺎﻙ ﻋ ﺪﺓ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻭﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴ ﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻤ ﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸ ﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧ ﺎﻩ ﻓ ﻲ ﺣﺎﻟ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤ ﻮﺩﻱ ﻓ ﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺠ ﺰء ﺍﻟ ﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺘﺪﻕ ﻣﺮﻓ ﻖ ﺍﺣ ﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ ً ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺘﺪﻕ ﺍﻟ ﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﻐﻤ ﻮﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴ ﺎ ً ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﻓﻴﻨ ﺪﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺗﺎﻯ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﻳﺮﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﻄﻴﺮ ‪Drip Lubrication‬‬

‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﺳ ﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴ ﺔ ﺟ ﺪﺍ ً ﻟﻸﺣﻤ ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻔ ﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳ ﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿ ﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺃﻋﻠ ﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻭﺯﻧ ﻚ ﻭﻳﺴ ﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺑ ﺎﻟﺘﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺍﻷﺳ ﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺠ ﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﻄﻤ ﺎ ً ﺑ ﺎﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟ ﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻭﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻄ ﺮﺍﺕ ﻫ ﻲ ﺑﻀ ﻊ‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٦‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ‪Circulating Lubrication‬‬

‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳ ﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﻤ ﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﺰﻳ ﺖ‬
‫ﺣﻴ ﺚ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﻳﻜ ﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳ ﺎً‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋ ﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳ ﻴﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﻫ ﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨ ﻮﻉ ﺍﻧ ﻪ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻭﻓﻠﺘﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺰﻳﺖ ﻷﺑﻘﺎﺋﻪ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺎ ً ﻭﺑﺎﺭﺩﺍ ً ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻓ ﻲ ﻫ ﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳ ﻖ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬ ﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺮﻳ ﻎ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟ ﻮﺩ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺑﻌ ﺪ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻤ ﺮ ﻣ ﻦ ﺧﻼﻟ ﻪ ﻟ ﺬﻟﻚ ﻓ ﺄﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺘ ﻲ ﺍﺩﺧ ﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺧ ﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻛﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻭﻛ ﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜ ﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳ ﻎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ ً ﺃﻭ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻲ )‪(Disc Lubrication‬‬

‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻐﻤ ﻮﺭ ﺑﺼ ﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴ ﺔ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺑﺴ ﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴ ﺔ ﺳ ﺎﺣﺒﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻂ ﺍﻟﻘ ﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻄ ﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺧ ﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺿ ﻮﻉ ﺑ ﺎﻟﺠﺰﻉء ﺍﻟﻌﻠ ﻮﻱ ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻭﺯﻧﻚ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟ ﻚ ﻳﻨﺤ ﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺃﺳ ﻔﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫ ﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘ ﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟ ﺔ ﻓﻘ ﻂ ﻓ ﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ً ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺑﺮﺟﺎﺭﺟﺮ )‪ (Supercharger‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺎﺥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٦‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺫﺍﺫ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ )‪(Oil mist lubrication‬‬

‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﻮﺍء ﻣﻈﻐﻮﻁ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺬﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫ ﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻁﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﻼﺣ ﻆ ﻓ ﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻓ ﺄﻥ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﻴ ﺖ ﻭﺍﺣ ﺪﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬ ﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴ ﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺰﻳﻴ ﺖ ﻋ ﺪﺓ ﻣﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﻓ ﻲ ﻧﻔ ﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗ ﺖ ﻛﻤ ﺎ ﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻗﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﺍً‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫‪ -٧‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء – ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ )‪(Air – Oil Lubrication‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘ ﺔ ﻓ ﺄﻥ ﺗﻤ ﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﻳ ﺘﻢ ﺗﻐ ﺬﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻜ ﻞ ﻣﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗ ﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﻼﺣﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻐ ﺬﺍﺓ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺗﺮﺳ ﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺯﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٨‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ )‪(Oil Jet Lubrication‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﺗ ﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀ ﻐﻂ ﻣﺒﺎﺷ ﺮﺓ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺟﺎﻧ ﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒ ﺮ ﻫ ﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳ ﻖ ﻫ ﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺜ ﺮ ﻣﻌﻮﻟﻴ ﺔ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻷﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘ ﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈ ﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴ ﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴ ﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴ ﺔ ‪...‬ﺍﻟ ﺦ(‪ .‬ﻫ ﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘ ﺔ ﺗﺴ ﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓ ﻲ ﺗﺰﻳﻴ ﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﺛ ﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺭﺑﻴﻨ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯﻳ ﺔ ﻭﻛ ﻞ ﺃﻧ ﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌ ﺪﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴ ﺮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻳ ﺘﻢ ﺣﻘ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﻧ ﻮﺯﻝ ﻣﺠ ﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺃﻳ ﺔ ﺣ ﺎﻝ ﻓ ﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺰﻭﺩ ﻋ ﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺜﻘ ﻮﺏ ﻳ ﺘﻢ ﻣ ﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬ ﺎ ﺣﻘ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘ ﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻄ ﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳ ﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻬﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻼﺕ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻄﻲء ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻁﻮﻳﻠﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻌﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺣﺘﻤﻴﺎ ً ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺗﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﺡ ﻭﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﻭﻣﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻷﻧﻬﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺂﻛﻞ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺅﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻴﺲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ً ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻅﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﻌﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٩‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻸﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺍﻹﻧﺰﻻﻗﻲ ﻭﺃﻧﻬﻴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻪ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻷﻧﻬﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ً ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻧﻬﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻬﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﻘﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ ﻭﻣﻨﻊ ﺗﺂﻛﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻪ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺎﺷﺮﺍ ً ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻮﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺃﺣﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﺠﺴﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﺐ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻧﺰﻻﻗﻴﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺰﻳﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺪﻥ ﻭﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺤﻮﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺭ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺻﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻧﺰﻻﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺂﻛﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺻﺎﺕ( ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺴﺮ اﻟﻘﻔﺺ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻴﻮب اﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻔﺸﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻁﺊ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻁﺊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻁﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺯﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﺙ ﺯﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻁﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ‪ OEM‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﺤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺧﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﻗﺪ ﻁﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺪ ﺑﺤﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (EPRI‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٩٢‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺻﻤﻢ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺾ )‪ (Overgreasing‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻴﺔ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٨٨‬ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻗﺪ ﺣﺼﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩٩٢‬ﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻭﻳﺔ ﻝ‬
‫)‪ (EPRI‬ﺑﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﺆﻱ ﻭﻭﻗﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻳﺴﻠﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ً ﻋﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺟﺰء‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﺩﻟﻴﻼً ﺧﺎﺻﺎ ً ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻛﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻟﻚ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﺤﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪(٢-‬‬
‫)‪ (same-side design‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﻧﺴﻴﺎﺑﻲ )ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪flow-through ) (١-‬‬
‫‪ .(design‬ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪ ٢-‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻥ ﺳﺪﺍﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ – ‪١‬‬
‫‪Flow-Through Design‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻧﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫‪١١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ – ‪٢‬‬
‫‪Same-Side fill and drain‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﻛﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‬

‫‪ -١‬ﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ )‪(Open Face Bearing‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜ ﻮﻥ ﻫ ﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻣ ﻦ ﺣﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴ ﺔ ﻭﺣﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴ ﺔ )‪(Inner & Outer Race‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﻔﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺩﺭﻭﻉ ﻭﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺣﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﻉ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )‪(Single Shielded Bearing‬‬
‫ﻫ ﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨ ﻮﻉ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﻳﺤﺘ ﻮﻱ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺩﺭﻉ ﻣ ﻦ ﺟﻬ ﺔ ﻭﺍﺣ ﺪﺓ ﻭﻫ ﻮ ﻳﺮﻛ ﺐ ﺩﺍﺋﻤ ﺎ ً ﺑﺤﻴ ﺚ ﺍﻥ ﺟﻬ ﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟ ﺪﺭﻉ ﺗﻘﺎﺑ ﻞ ﻣﻠ ﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﺮﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻫ ﻮ ﻗﺎﺑ ﻞ ﻷﻋ ﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸ ﺤﻴﻢ ﻭﺑ ﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘ ﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴ ﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﻋﻴﻦ )‪(Double Shielded Bearing‬‬
‫ﻫ ﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨ ﻮﻉ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﻣ ﺰﻭﺩ ﺑ ﺪﺭﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻌ ﺪﻧﻴﻴﻦ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺠ ﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ ﻭﻫ ﻮ ﻣﺼ ﻤﻢ ﻟﻜ ﻲ ﻳﺤ ﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠ ﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﻉ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺠﻮﺓ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻴ ﺔ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴ ﺔ ﻭﺍﻟ ﺪﺭﻭﻉ ﻟﻜ ﻲ ﻳ ﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺤﻢ ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻟﻚ ﻧﻘﺎﺵ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﻫ ﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨ ﻮﻉ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴ ﺔ ﺍﻋ ﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻮﻣﺔ( )‪(Sealed Bearing‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺻﻤﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺒﻪ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟ ﺪﺭﻋﻴﻦ ﻣ ﻊ ﻓ ﺮﻕ ﻭﺍﺣ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴ ﺔ ﺗﻨﺰﻟ ﻖ‬
‫ﺿﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﺎﻡ )‪ (Seals‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳ ﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﻏﻴ ﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺠ ﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻴ ﺔ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺘ ﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴ ﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ‬

‫‪ -١‬ﻧﻘﺼﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ )‪(Lubricant Starvation‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﺊ ﻓﺠﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﻴ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺤﻢ ﺃﺛﻨ ﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴ ﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳ ﺰﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺤﻢ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ )‪(Grease Incompatibility‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻛ ﻞ ﺃﻧ ﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺤﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀ ﻬﺎ ﺍﻟ ﺒﻌﺾ ﻟ ﺬﻟﻚ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬ ﻢ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔ ﺲ ﺍﻟﻨ ﻮﻉ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺤﻢ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻁ ﻮﻝ ﺣﻴ ﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺻﺎﻧﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺤﻢ ﺧﺎﻁﺊ )‪(Wrong Grease‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻢ ﺟﺪﺍ ً ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﺼ ﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻄﻠ ﺐ ﺷ ﺤﻢ ﻟﻸﻏ ﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣ ﺔ )‪ (General Purpose‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤ ﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻫ ﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠ ﺐ ﺷ ﺤﻢ ﺫﻭ‬
‫ﺿ ﻐﻮﻁ ﻓﺎﺋﻘ ﺔ )‪ . (Extreme Pressure‬ﻟ ﺬﻟﻚ ﻓ ﺄﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴ ﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻋ ﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸ ﺤﻴﻢ ﺑﺸ ﺤﻢ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻁﺊ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺯﻳ ﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀ ﻐﻂ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺍﻟ ﺪﺭﻭﻉ ) ‪Overpressurization of the Bearing‬‬
‫‪(Shields‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺠﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻀ ﻐﻂ ﻳ ﺰﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀ ﺮﺭ ﻣﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤ ﺪﺙ‬
‫ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻣﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺍﻟ ﺪﺭﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔ ﺮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻣﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤ ﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟ ﺪﺭﻭﻉ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻤ ﺖ ﺇﻋ ﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸ ﺤﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸ ﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﺮﻙ ﻓ ﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺤﻢ ﺳ ﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻤ ﺪﺩ ﺑﺴ ﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻓ ﺄﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧ ﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺠﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻀ ﻐﻂ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺍﻟ ﺪﺭﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺰﺍﺡ ﺍﻟ ﺪﺭﻭﻉ ﻣ ﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬ ﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟ ﺪﺭﻉ ﺍﻟﺨ ﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳ ﺪﻓﻊ ﻗﻔ ﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٣‬‬
‫‪Figure 6. Overgreasing Failure‬‬
‫‪Figure 7. Shield was pressurized by‬‬

‫‪excessive grease which caused a cage failure.‬‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺽ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻙ )‪(Inside of Motor full of Grease‬‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﻣﺗﻸﺕ ﻓﺟﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﻭﺃﺳﺗﺭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺽ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺟﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻭﺍﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٤‬‬
‫‪Figure 8. Overgreasing caused inside‬‬

‫‪of motor to fill with grease.‬‬
‫‪ -٦‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺽ ) ‪Overheating due to excess‬‬

‫‪(grease‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﻛﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻛﻣﺿﺧﺎﺕ ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺩﺣﺭﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺿﺧﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﺳﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺑﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻓﺷﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ‬

‫ﻫﻧﺎﻟﻙ ﺷﻲء ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺿﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﺷﺣﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺽ ﻟﻛﻲ ﻳﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﻓﺟﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺛﺎﻟﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻝ ﻓﺟﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﻣﻭﺿﺣﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻠﻳﻥ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Figure 9. The pressure cut-off-fill-plug does not allow additional grease‬‬

‫)‪to be added to a grease cavity when the pressure exceeds 20 psi. (Left‬‬
‫‪Figure 10. The plunger drain plug opens the center plunger on 1 to 5 psi‬‬
‫)‪to purge excess grease and pressure. (Right‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺳﺩﺍﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ‪ drain plug‬ﻟﻠ ﺗﺧﻠﺹ‬
‫ﻣ ﻥ ﺍﻟﺿ ﻐﻁ ﺍﻹﺿ ﺎﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺷ ﺣﻡ ﺍﻹﺿ ﺎﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧ ﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷ ﺣﻳﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿ ﺣﺔ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺷ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ )‪ (Alemite‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺍﺳ ﺗﻌﻣﻠﺕ ﺑﻧﺟ ﺎﺡ ﻓ ﻲ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘ ﺎﺕ ﺻ ﻧﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺣﻁﺎﻁ ﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ )‪(Grease Degradation‬‬

‫ﺍﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻧﺧﻔ ﺎﺽ ﻛﻔ ﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷ ﺣﻡ ﻫ ﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳ ﺔ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳ ﺔ ﻭﻟﻳﺳ ﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺋ ﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻏﺎﻟﺑ ﺎ ً ﻣ ﺎ ﻳﻅﻬ ﺭ ﺗ ﺄﺛﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺭﻙ ﺷﻐﺎﻻً‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳ ﺔ ﺣ ﺎﻝ ﻣﻣﻛ ﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣ ﺩﺙ ﺑﻳﻧﻣ ﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺣ ﺭﻙ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻁﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻧﺣﻁﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪-:‬‬
‫ﺗﺻ ﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺷ ﺣﻡ )‪ -: (Grease Hardening‬ﻳﺣ ﺩﺙ ﻫ ﺫﺍ ﻋ ﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻧ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻣ ﺗﺹ ﺍﻟﺷ ﺣﻡ‬ ‫‪-١‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺳﺩ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺷ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﻣﻳ ﺎﻭﻱ )‪ -: (Chemical Breakdown‬ﻣﻣﻛ ﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺣ ﺩﺙ ﺑﺳ ﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺳ ﺧﻳﻥ‬ ‫‪-٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺽ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻣ ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳ ﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳ ﺔ )‪ -: (High Bearing Loads‬ﺍﻥ ﻣﺣﺭﻛ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣ ﻝ ﺍﻟﺟ ﺎﻧﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪-٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺻ ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻳ ﺕ ﻋ ﻥ ﻣ ﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷ ﺣﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳ ﻳﺔ ) ‪Oil Separation from grease‬‬ ‫‪-٤‬‬
‫‪ -: (Base Material‬ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻫ ﺫﺍ ﻣ ﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻛ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗ ﻲ ﺗﺑﻘ ﻰ ﻋﺎﻁﻠ ﺔ ﻟﻔﺗ ﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻠ ﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﺿﺧﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺷﺣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﻧﺩ )‪ -: (Rotational Speed of the Bearing‬ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ‬ ‫‪-٥‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻛﺛﺭ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺣﻁﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ )‪ -: (Bearing Size‬ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﺣﻁﺎﻁ ﺃﻛﺛ ﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪-٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﻳﺔ )‪ -: (Environment‬ﻋﻧ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻣ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳ ﻧﺩ ﺑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣ ﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺑ ﺭ ﻣ ﻥ‬ ‫‪-٧‬‬
‫‪ ١٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻏﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻳﺔ ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﺣﻁﺎﻁ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ )‪(Regreasing Program‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻝ ﻋﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺧ ﺫ ﺑﻧﻅ ﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺗﺑ ﺎﺭ ﻟﺗ ﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺭﻧ ﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋ ﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷ ﺣﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻖ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻙ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻘﺭﺭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳ ﻧﺩ‬ ‫‪-١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻖ ﻣ ﻝء ﺍﻟﺷ ﺣﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟ ﻲ ﻟﺗﺟﻭﻳ ﻑ ﺍﻟﺷ ﺣﻡ ﻟﺿ ﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺭﻓ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻔ ﺭﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﻣﺗ ﻭﻓﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﺷ ﺣﻳﻡ ﻓ ﻲ‬ ‫‪-٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻳﻳ ﺯ ﻧ ﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷ ﺣﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳ ﺗﺧﺩﻡ )‪ GP , EP‬ﺃﻭ ﺷ ﺣﻡ ﺻ ﻧﺎﻋﻲ( ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻬ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ﻧﻌﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛ ﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪-٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻌﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺎﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺎﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﺄﻥ ﻧﺟﺎﺣﻪ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﺗﻣﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-٦‬‬
‫‪١١٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ )‪(Regreasing Techniques‬‬

‫ﻛﻳﻑ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺿﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ؟‬
‫ﺑﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﺿﺧﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻟﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺗﻘﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﺣﻳﻣﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﺟﺏ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺣﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻟﻳﺱ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺽ ﻣﻥ ﻓﺟﻭﺓ ﻣﻣﻠﻭءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺷﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺻﻝ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺩﻯ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪-:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻣﺔ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-١‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺳﺩﺍﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﻼء ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﺭﺷﺎﺓ ﺣﻠﺯﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺗﺟﻭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ‬ ‫‪-٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺳﺩﺍﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎﺱ ﻓﺄﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺗﻠﻐﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺿﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺑﺑﻁء ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪-٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺗﺟﻭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ ﺗﺅﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺣﺎﻟﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪-٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺗﻣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻥ ﺳﺩﺍﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﺎﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺽ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺩﺍﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ‬ ‫‪-٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻡ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﻧﺩ؟ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭ ﻫﻧﺎ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪-:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬ ‫‪-١‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻊ‬ ‫‪-٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪-٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﺫﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺑﺩﺭﻉ ﻭﺑﺩﺭﻋﻳﻥ )ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺗﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺭﻙ( ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪-٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻭﻣﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﺣﻳﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪-٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻙ‬ ‫‪-٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬ ‫‪-٧‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺃﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ‪ ١٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻧﺳﺑﻳﺎً‪ .‬ﺃﻱ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﺩ ﻟﻸﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻭﺙ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺟﺭﺍء ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺎﻣﻳﻡ ﻓﺄﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻗﻝ‬ ‫‪- a‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‬ ‫‪- b‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٥٨‬ﺷﻬﺭ‬ ‫‪- c‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻻﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺷﻬﺭ‬ ‫‪- d‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻳﺔ ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٢٢‬ﺷﻬﺭ‬ ‫‪- e‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻳﺔ ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١١‬ﺷﻬﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪- f‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻓﺄﻥ ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺔ ﺑﻭﻗﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﻡ ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺑﺎﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻳﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﻳﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻟﺩﻳﻪ ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺎﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٣٦‬ﺷﻬﺭ ﻓﺄﻥ ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﻁﻊ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺎﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ٤٨‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ٧٢‬ﺷﻬﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺎ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﺍﻟﺕ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﻋﻳﻥ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺗﻪ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ ﻓﺄﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻧﺩ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺫﻛﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻧﺩ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﻭﻉ ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺿﺎﻋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﻳﺿﺎﻑ ﻧﺻﻑ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺇﻣﻼء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺭ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺽ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﻟﻳﺱ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﻣﺣﻣﻲ )ﺳﻭﺍء ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺫﻭ ﺩﺭﻉ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺟﻭﺓ ﻣﻣﻠﻭءﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﻧﺻﻑ ﻟﺗﺭﻙ ﻓﺭﺍﻍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺿﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻓﺟﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻐﻁﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺿﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻪ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻣﺎﺳﺎ ً ﻟﻠﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﻓﺄﺫﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻟﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺣﺻﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻧﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻟﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ ﺑﺄﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻓﺟﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﺳﻭﻑ ﻟﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﺷﺣﻡ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﺑﻘﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺑﺑﺎ ً ﻧﻘﺻﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺑﺑﺎ ً ﺑﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻓﺷﻼً ﻣﺣﺗﻣﻼً ﻟﻠﻣﺳﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﺗﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺽ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺳﻪ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻭﺇﻻ ﺳﻳﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻙ‪ .‬ﻟﺳﻭء ﺍﻟﺣﻅ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺻﻌﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺱ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﻓﺄﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺏ ﺍﻷﺣﻳﺎﻥ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﺙ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺽ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﺭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺹ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﻼء ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺿﺎﻑ؟‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺿﺎﻑ ﻟﻣﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻳﺟﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻙ )ﻗﻁﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ‪.(Shaft Diameter‬‬
‫ﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﺄﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻧﺴﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺣﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻮﻫﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫‪١١٩‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻓﺄﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻷﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻌﻄﻰ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺣﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺄﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﻠﻌﺐ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ً ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻳﺴ ﻴﻄﺮ ﻋﻠ ﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻓﻠﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﺳ ﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻮﻗ ﻒ ﻋ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤ ﻞ ﻭﻟﻜ ﻦ ﺧ ﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼ ﻨﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﺎ ً ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺍ ً ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﻨﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺬﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺪﻩ ﻟﻴﻘﺪﻡ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎ ً ﻷﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻧﻮﻋﻴ ﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨ ﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻸﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺯﻣﻦ ﻁﻮﻳﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟ ﻮ ﺗ ﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒ ﻪ ﺑﺼ ﻮﺭﺓ ﺻ ﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎً‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺴ ﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻌ ﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨ ﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸ ﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟ ﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺟﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﻐﻮﻁ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻋﻰ ﺍﻧ ﻪ ﺍﻟﻌ ﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠ ﻲ ﻟﻠ ﺪﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﻳ ﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ )ﺃﻭ ﻋ ﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴ ﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸ ﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨ ﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺸ ﻞ‪ .‬ﻛﻤ ﺎ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻳﺼ ﺒﺢ ﺃﻳﻀ ﺎ ً ﻏﻴ ﺮ ﻧ ﺎﻓﻊ ﺑﺴ ﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﻟﺘﺼ ﺎﻕ )‪ (Seizing‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻁﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺔ ‪...‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨ ﺎﻁﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣ ﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻁﺊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺳ ﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴ ﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄ ﺄ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼ ﻤﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼ ﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻫ ﻮ ﺃﻛﺜ ﺮ ﺗﻜ ﺮﺍﺭﺍ ً‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ ﺑﺴﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺸﺮﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ‪Inspection of Bearing‬‬

‫ﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ً ﻟﻠﺤﺆﻭﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀ ﺮﻭﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ً ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‪-:‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴ ﺮ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻳ ﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒ ﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳ ﺔ ﺑﻌ ﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸ ﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺧ ﻼﻝ ﻓﺘ ﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺤ ﺺ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳ ﺔ‬
‫ﻷﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻢ ﺟﺪﺍ ً ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺍﻟﺼ ﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼ ﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳ ﺪ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺤ ﺺ ﻭﻛ ﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﺘ ﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳ ﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﻨﺔ ‪Inspection When Machine is Running‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ﺎ ً ﻓ ﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸ ﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺴ ﺘﻘﺮ ﺧ ﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤ ﻞ ﺑﻘﻴﻤ ﺔ ﺃﻗ ﻞ ﻣ ﻦ ﺩﺭﺟ ﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ) ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ٤٠ – ١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻌ ﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻗ ﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﻧ ﻮﻉ ﻭﺳ ﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻷﺿ ﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﻣ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴ ﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺑﻀ ﻊ ﺳ ﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﻣ ﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﻗ ﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸ ﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﺘﺨ ﺬ ﺍﻷﺟ ﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼ ﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻏﻴ ﺮ ﻣﺮﻏ ﻮﺏ ﻣﻄﻠﻘ ﺎ ً ﻟﻌﻤ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻭﻛ ﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺸ ﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴ ﺖ‪ .‬ﻋ ﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜ ﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟ ﺔ ﺣ ﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸ ﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺃﻗ ﻞ ﻣ ﻦ ﺫ‪ ٠٠‬ﺩﺭﺟ ﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻵﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪-:‬‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻁ ﺟﺪﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫‪-١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺊ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﺍ ً ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺪﺍ‪ً.‬‬ ‫‪-٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺪﺍ ً ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺪﻭﺩ ﻭﺷﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺰﻳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺣﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻼﺻﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-٦‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﺗﺼ ﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﻭﺃﺳ ﺒﺎﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟ ﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈ ﺔ ﺑ ﺄﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻫﻮ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻯ ﺷﻴﺊ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٢‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺃﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ )‪(Vibration of Bearing‬‬

‫ﺍﻥ ﺿ ﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻣﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌ ﻴﻦ ﻋ ﻦ ﻁﺮﻳ ﻖ ﻗﻴ ﺎﺱ ﺍﻫﺘ ﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﻨ ﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﻧﺴ ﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻀ ﺮﺭ ﻣﻜﻜ ﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳ ﺘﻨﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻣ ﻦ ﺗﺤﻠﻴ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻘ ﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴ ﺔ ﻟﺴ ﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺘ ﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﻛ ﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﻴﻤ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘ ﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺃﻳ ﺔ ﺣ ﺎﻝ ‪،‬ﻓ ﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻘ ﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺳﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺄﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺠﻤﻴ ﻊ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ )‪(Lubricant Selection‬‬

‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﻫﻮ ﻁﻼء ﺍﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ ﺑﻄﻘﺔ ﺭﻗﻴﻘ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻷﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌ ﺎﺩﻥ )‪ .(metal-to-metal contact‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴ ﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌ ﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪-:‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻟﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﺗﺒﻘ ﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺴ ﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒ ﺔ )ﻋﻨﺎﺻ ﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠ ﻮﺙ( ﺑﻌﻴ ﺪﺍ ً ﻋ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻ ﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟ ﺔ ﻭﻣﻤ ﺮ ﺣﺮﻛ ﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪-:‬‬
‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻ ﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟ ﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺑﺴ ﺒﺐ ﺳ ﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣ ﻞ ﻣ ﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻭﺑﺴﺎﻁﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻨ ﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴ ﺮﺏ‪ .‬ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﺒ ﺎﺭ ﻧ ﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺤﻢ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳ ﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳ ﺪ ﺧ ﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺨﻦ ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴ ﺎﺭ ﻧ ﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺤﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳ ﺐ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻈ ﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸ ﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣ ﺔ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ﻣﻘ ﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺳ ﻚ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺤﻢ )‪ (Consistency‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘ ﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻄﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪-:‬‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ‬

‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳ ﺐ ﻟﺘﺴ ﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﻟﺰﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺟﺔ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﺰﻭﺟ ﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺴ ﺪ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳ ﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣ ﺔ ﺗﻜ ﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺑﻮﻥ‪...‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻼً ﻷﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﺰﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ ﻭﺑﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﺰﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺍﻷﺳ ﺎﺱ ﺗﺘ ﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺑﻤ ﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟ ﺰﻣﻦ ﻟ ﺬﻟﻚ ﺗ ﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟ ﺔ ﺍﻟ ﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺤﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻓ ﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴ ﺖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺍﻟﺴ ﺎﺋﻞ ﻓ ﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺘ ﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺘﻤ ﺪ ﻋﻠ ﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﻧ ﺎﻩ ﻳ ﻮﻓﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻼً ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺘﺒﺪﻟﺔ ﺑﻌ ﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺤ ﺺ ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗ ﺘﻢ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺘﻬ ﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮﺩﺓ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻋﻤ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻓﻴﻤ ﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛ ﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺿ ﻴﺎ ً ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗ ﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳ ﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺷ ﻲء ﻏﻴ ﺮ ﻁﺒﻴﻌ ﻲ ﻓﻴﺠ ﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳ ﺪ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺬﻭﺫ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺻ ﻞ ﻭﺗﻌﻴ ﻴﻦ ﺳ ﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺬﻭﺫ ﻛﻤ ﺎ ﺳ ﻨﺄﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﻴ ﻪ‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺑ ﻞ ﻟﻸﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺘ ﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻬ ﺎء ﻋﻤ ﺮ ﺍﻟﻜ ﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺨ ﺎﺹ ﺑ ﻪ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗ ﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣ ﻞ ﻣﻌ ﻪ ﺑﺼ ﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻ ﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻣ ﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻓﺸ ﻞ ﻣﺴ ﺒﻘﺎ ً ﻓﻤ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤ ﻞ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴ ﺒﺐ ﻫ ﻮ ﺧﻄ ﺄ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻴ ﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣ ﻞ ﻣ ﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌ ﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴ ﺎﻥ ﻧﺠ ﺪ ﺻ ﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻓ ﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳ ﺪ ﺳ ﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺗﺠﻨ ﺐ ﺗﻜ ﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺜ ﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻷﺧ ﺬ ﺑﻨﻈ ﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﺘﺒ ﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳ ﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻋﺘﻤ ﺎﺩﺍ ً ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺣﺎﻟ ﺔ ﻭﻅ ﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﻨ ﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸ ﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺍﺳﺎﺳ ﻬﺎ ﻓﺸ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛ ﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺍﻷﺧ ﺬ ﺑﻨﻈ ﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﺘﺒ ﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﻗ ﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺼ ﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﻪ ﻭﺗﻌﺰﻳ ﺰﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﺻ ﻮﺭ ﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛ ﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓ ﺔ ﺃﺳ ﺒﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺸﻴﺮ)‪) (Flaking‬ﺍﻟﻘﺸﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬

‫‪ -١‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤ ﺮ ﺣﺮﻛ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘ ﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻛ ﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺣﺮﺟ ﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺸ ﺮ ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒ ﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻈ ﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸ ﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤ ﻞ ﺍﻧ ﻪ ﺣﺼ ﻞ ﺑﺴ ﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺒﻨﻲ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺃﻛﺒ ﺮ ﻣ ﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴ ﻄﺢ ﺑﻌ ﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺸ ﻴﺮ ﺃﺻ ﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﻤ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋ ﺪ ﺑﺴ ﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣ ﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻠ ﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺸﻨﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺯﻳ ﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﺰﻭﺟ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺤ ﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴ ﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺤﺴ ﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﻣ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴ ﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻄ ﺄ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴ ﺐ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺧ ﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻁﺒﻘﺔ ﺯﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺗﺼ ﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄ ﺄ ﻓ ﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٨‬‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺸﺮ )‪) (Peeling‬ﺍﻟﻘﺸﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻟﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً(‬


‫‪ -١‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺸﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤ ﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤ ﺪﺙ ﻓ ﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺸﺮ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﻗﻴ ﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟ ﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻴ ﻞ ﺍﻟ ﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻈﺎﻳﺎ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤ ﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛ ﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴ ﻄﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺧﺸﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ ً ﺃﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻀ ﻤﻦ ﺷ ﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺖ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺻ ﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠ ﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻄ ﻮﺭ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺗﻘﺸ ﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺤ ﻮﻝ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺷ ﻈﺎﻳﺎ‬
‫)‪.(Flaking‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻈﻲ )‪(Spalling‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﺗﺤﺴ ﻴﻦ ﻁ ﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺼ ﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺒ ﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀ ﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻓ ﻲ ﻣﺠ ﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨ ﺪﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﺘ ﻲ ﺗﺼ ﺎﺣﺐ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼ ﺐ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺍﻟ ﺔ‪ .‬ﻋ ﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﺘﺼ ﺎﻕ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻜ ﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨ ﺪﻭﺵ‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻁﺒﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺑﺴ ﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﺗﺠ ﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺨ ﺪﻭﺵ‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤ ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋ ﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳ ﺔ ﻭﺟ ﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘ ﺪﺣﺮﺝ‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴ ﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻜ ﺎﻓﺊ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺤﺼ ﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴ ﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒ ﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻜ ﻮﻥ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺷ ﻜﻞ ﺍﺿ ﻼﻉ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻨﻈﻮﻣ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴ ﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤ ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴ ﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻀ ﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳ ﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤ ﺰﻭﺯ ﺗﻜ ﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﺗﺠ ﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺤ ﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴ ﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻤ ﺮ ﺣﺮﻛ ﺔ‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﺗﺤﺴ ﻦ ﻛﻔ ﺎءﺓ ﻣﻮﺍﻧ ﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘ ﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻭﻭﺟ ﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻ ﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻄﺦ )‪(Smearing‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴ ﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺍﻷﻓﻀ ﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ ﺗﻨﺰﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺸﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻘﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻨﻈﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴ ﺖ ﺍﻷﻓﻀ ﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻕ ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻁﺒﻘ ﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺖ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍ ً ﻟﺘﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﺰﻻﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻳﺖ ﻳﺤﺘ ﻮﻱ ﻋﻠ ﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺍﺧ ﺬ ﺍﻹﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣ ﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺜ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠ ﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻄ ﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻤ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘ ﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﻨ ﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﺰﻻﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ )‪(Stepped Wear‬‬


‫‪ -١‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴ ﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺍﻷﻓﻀ ﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺂﻛ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟ ﻪ ﺑﺤﻴ ﺚ ﺗﺼ ﺒﺢ ﺩﺧ ﻮﻝ ﺃﺟﺴ ﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒ ﺔ ﺧﺸ ﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻨﻈﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌ ﺎﺩ ﺃﻗ ﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧ ﺔ ﺑﺒﻘﻴ ﺔ ﺻﻠﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳ ﺎﺧﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﺴ ﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒ ﺔ‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺗﺤﺴ ﻴﻦ ﻛﻔ ﺎءﺓ ﻣﻮﺍﻧ ﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪ .‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻳﺘﺨﺸﻦ ﺃﺧ ﺮﻯ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳ ﺖ ﻧﻔﺴ ﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴ ﺖ ﺍﻟﻀ ﻌﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻣ ﻴﻼﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﻳﺘﺤﺰﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻼﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻘﻊ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪(Speckles and Discoloration‬‬


‫ﻅﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎء ﻟﻤﻌﺔ ﻭﺟ ﻪ ﺩﺧ ﻮﻝ ﺃﺷ ﻴﺎء ﻏﺮﻳﺒ ﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴ ﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻘﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺣﺮﺝ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷ ﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻀ ﻌﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﻐﻴ ﺮ ﻁﻔﻴ ﻒ ﺑ ﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪ -١‬ﺗﺤﺴ ﻴﻦ ﻛﻔ ﺎءﺓ ﻣﻮﺍﻧ ﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴ ﺮﺏ ﻭﻣﺮﺷ ﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﻗﻴ ﺪ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺰﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘ ﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴ ﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺮﺳ ﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺗﺮﺳ ﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﻗﺎﺑ ﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺴ ﻦ ﻋ ﻦ ﻁﺮﻳ ﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻤﺲ ﺑﻤﺤﻠ ﻮﻝ ﻋﻀ ﻮﻱ‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻣﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﻛﺴﺎﻟﻴﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟ ﻢ ﻳ ﺘﻢ ﺍﻟ ﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺸ ﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﻓ ﺄﻥ ﻫ ﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺸ ﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻫ ﻲ ﻋﺒ ﺎﺭﺓ ﻋ ﻦ ﺻ ﺪﺃ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳ ﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻣ ﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺯﻳ ﻞ ﻛﻠﻴ ﺎ ً‬
‫ﻓﺄﻧ ﻪ ﺗﻐﻴ ﺮ ﻁﻔﻴ ﻒ ﺑ ﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺰﻳﺰ)ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻠﻢ( )ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺮﺝ( )‪(Indentation‬‬

‫ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-١‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔ ﺮ ﻓ ﻲ ﻣﻤ ﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘ ﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺩﺧ ﻮﻝ ﺃﺷ ﻴﺎء ﻏﺮﻳﺒ ﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺤﺼ ﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺤ ﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﻣ ﻦ‬ ‫‪-٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺠ ﺖ ﺑﺴ ﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﺟﺴ ﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼ ﻠﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺟ ﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺸ ﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼ ﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺸ ﺮ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗ ﻢ ﺍﻧﺘ ﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺼ ﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣ ﻞ ﻣ ﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤ ﺰﻭﺯ ﺑﺴ ﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻁﺊ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴ ﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣ ﻞ‬ ‫‪-٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺘﺬﺍﺫ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﺭ( )‪(Chipping‬‬

‫ﺗﺸ ﺬﺭ ﺟﺰﺋ ﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴ ﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺼ ﺎﺭ ﺃﺟ ﺰﺍء ﻛﺒﻴ ﺮﺓ ﺻ ﻠﺪﺓ‪ -١ .‬ﺗﺤ ﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠ ﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺴ ﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼ ﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟ ﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣ ﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴ ﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻ ﺮ ﺍﻟﺼ ﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻤ ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋ ﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻲء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺗﺤﺴ ﻴﻦ ﺧ ﻮﺍﺹ ﻣ ﺎﻧﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻘﻖ )‪(Cracking‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒ ﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺤﺴ ﻴﻦ ﺍﺳ ﺒﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻧﻔﺼ ﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸ ﻘﻘﺎﺕ ﻓ ﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺾ ﺟﺪﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﺎﻧﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻ ﺮ‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺣﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺤ ﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴ ﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳ ﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺊ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺨﻲ ﺟﺪﺍ ً‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪١٣٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺔ )‪(Rust and Corrosion‬‬

‫ﺗﺤﺴ ﻴﻦ ﺗ ﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺘ ﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪-١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺧ ﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤ ﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤ ﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻵﻛﻠ ﺔ‬ ‫ﺻ ﺪﺃ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳ ﺔ ﺣﻠﻘ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ(‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﺽ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺰﻳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-٢‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺜ ﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺨ ﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟ ﻮﺩ ﻓ ﻲ‬ ‫ﻓ ﻲ ﺑﻌ ﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴ ﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻜ ﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼ ﺪﺃ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻣﺴ ﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺴ ﺎﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺟ ﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳ ﺎﺕ ﺣ ﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪-٤‬‬ ‫ﺳ ﻮء ﺍﻟ ﺮﺯﻡ ﻭﺣﺎﻟ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺨ ﺰﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻ ﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼ ﺪﺃ ﻋﻨ ﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘ ﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻁﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺟﻨﺔ )ﺍﻹﻟﺘﺼﺎﻕ( )‪(Seizing‬‬

‫ﺗﺤﺴ ﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﻣ ﺔ ﺗﺒﺮﻳ ﺪ‬ ‫‪-١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟ ﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻋ ﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﺘﻮﻟﻴ ﺪ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺛ ﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤ ﺪﺙ ﻋﻤﻠﻴ ﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﺘﺼ ﺎﻕ ﻋ ﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴ ﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳ ﺐ‬ ‫‪-٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴ ﺖ ﺍﻟﺴ ﻲء ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﻏﻴ ﺮ‬ ‫ﻁﺮﻳ ﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺤ ﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻛ ﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻳﺠ ﺎﺕ ﻣﻌ ﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘ ﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻠ ﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻌ ﻴﻢ ﻭﻟﺤ ﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻨ ﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ‬ ‫‪-٣‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﻴﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘ ﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻄ ﺄ‬ ‫ﺳ ﻄﺢ ﻣﻤ ﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘ ﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟ ﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘ ﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-٤‬‬ ‫ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﻋﺼﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴ ﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻈ ﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫‪-٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻚ )‪(Fretting and Fretting Corrosion‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴ ﺔ‬ ‫‪-١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛ ﺎﻥ ﻫﻨ ﺎﻙ ﺣﻤ ﻞ ﺍﻫﺘ ﺰﺍﺯﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳ ﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺂﻛﻠ ﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤ ﻚ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴ ﺔ ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻠﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻼﻣﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺻﺪﺃ ﺣﻤ ﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻠ ﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻘ ﻞ ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻟ ﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻣ ﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻓﺘ ﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﻳ ﺔ ﻗﺼ ﻴﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﻔﺮﺍً‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧ ﺖ ﻏﻴ ﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ﺔ‬ ‫ﻓ ﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﻳ ﺖ ﻳﻘ ﺎﺩ ﺧ ﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘ ﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻜ ﻮﻥ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺳ ﻄﺢ ﻣﻤ ﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻔﺼ ﻞ ﻓﻴﺠ ﺐ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟ ﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘ ﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺘﺂﻛ ﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘ ﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺠ ﺎﺕ ﺑﺴ ﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟ ﺰﺍء ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻧﺤ ﻮ ﻻﻓ ﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻁﺊ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻣﺴ ﺎﻓﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪-٢‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴ ﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﺎﻓﺔ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻ ﺮ‬
‫ﺷ ﺤﻢ ﻋ ﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺳ ﻚ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺑﺬﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓ ﻲ ﺟﺎﻟ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤ ﻞ ﻓﻴ ﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴ ﺖ ﺳ ﻲء )ﻻﻭﺟ ﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻅ ﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛ ﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺰﻳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺬﺑﺬﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ )ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻭﻏﻄ ﺎء‬ ‫‪-٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺘ ﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﺒﻌ ﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻄ ﺎء ﻓ ﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺼ ﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺗﺨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ )‪(Electrical Pitting‬‬

‫ﻣ ﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴ ﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑ ﺎﺋﻲ ﻣ ﻦ ﻳﺠ ﺐ ﺗﺠﻨ ﺐ ﻣ ﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴ ﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﺘﺒﻘﻊ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺧ ﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺘﻜ ﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸ ﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑ ﺎﺋﻲ ﻋ ﻦ ﻁﺮﻳ ﻖ ﺗﻔ ﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻘ ﻊ ﻋﺒ ﺎﺭﺓ ﻋ ﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﻗﻴ ﺪ ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟ ﻰ ﺍﻧﺼ ﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺟ ﻪ ﻣﻤ ﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳ ﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘ ﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘ ﺮ ﺍﻟﺼ ﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻨ ﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻼﺣ ﻆ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳ ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻣﻌ ﺰﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻄ ﻮﺭ ﻫ ﺬﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻤﻮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤١‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻼﻥ ﻣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺣﺮﺟﺔ )‪(Rolling Path Skewing‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﺗﺤﺴ ﻴﻦ ﺩﻗ ﺔ ﺗﺼ ﻨﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺴ ﺎﺭ ﺗﻼﻣ ﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻ ﺮ ﺗﺸ ﻮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻣ ﻴﻼﻥ ﺣﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻭﺯﻧﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟ ﺔ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻭﺟ ﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻤ ﺮ ﺑﺴ ﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻗ ﺔ ﺍﻟﻀ ﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤ ﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺗﺤﺴ ﻴﻦ ﺻ ﻼﺑﺔ ﻣﻌ ﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻭﺯﻧﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﻭﺯﻧﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼ ﻼﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻀ ﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤ ﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻠﻮﺹ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻭﺯﻧﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺤ ﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭ ﺑﺴ ﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻀﺮﺭ ﻗﻔﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﺎﺕ )‪(Damage of Retainers‬‬

‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-١‬‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻡ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻛﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴ ﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﻣ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴ ﺖ‬ ‫‪-٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟ ﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﺴ ﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴ ﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﺂﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺷﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻗﻔﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻲء‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺤﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳ ﺔ ﺻ ﻼﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪-٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﻭﺯﻧﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪١٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺣﻒ )‪(Creeping‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳ ﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻼﺻ ﻘﺔ ﺗﺒ ﺪﺃ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺍﺭﺗﺨ ﺎء ﺗﺜﺒﻴ ﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴ ﺔ‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﺟﺞ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﻛ ﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴ ﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻘ ﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﻭﺯﻧﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴ ﺔ ﻓﺄﻧﻬ ﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﺨ ﻲ ﻣ ﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻜﺴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠ ﺰء ﺍﻟﺨ ﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛ ﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻭﺯﻧ ﻚ ﻣﺼ ﻨﻮﻋﺎ ً ﻣ ﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺒﻴﻜﺔ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻤﻨﻴﻮﻡ ﻓ ﺄﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﺗﺨﻲ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٤‬‬
‫‪١٤٥‬‬

Basicsof Bearings

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Basicsof Bearings

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﻐﺩﺍﺩ‬

‫أ‪.‬م‪.‬د‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺴﻦ اﻟﺸﻤﺮي‬

‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺭﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ‬

‫‪١١٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼ ﻮﻝ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺗﺒ ﺎﻁ ﺑ ﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸ ﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌ ﺪﻥ ﻓ ﻲ ﻧﻔ ﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﺎﻝ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺫﻟ ﻚ ﺣﻴ ﺚ‬

‫ﺳﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺠﻴﺔ‬

‫)‪(History of SKF‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟـ ‪SKF‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ١٩١٠‬ﺍﻣﺘﻠﻜﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﻭ‪ ٣٢٥‬ﻣﻮﻅﻒ ﻣﻨﻪ ‪ %١٥‬ﻳﻌﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺣﺮﺟﻴﺔ )‪(Selection of Bearings‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ ً ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﻄﺔ‬

‫‪ -٢‬ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﻂ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻱ )‪(Axial Load‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ )‪(Combined Load‬‬

‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ ً ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ )‪( Misalignment‬‬

‫ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺎ ً ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )‪(Speed‬‬

‫ﺧﺎﻣﺴﺎ ً ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(Precision‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺩﺳﺎ ً ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ )ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ( )‪(Silent Running‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺑﻌﺎ ً ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺠﺴﺎءﺓ )‪(Stiffness‬‬

‫ﺛﺎﻣﻨﺎ ً ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺰﺣﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻱ )‪(Axial Displacement‬‬

‫ﺗﺎﺳﻌﺎ ً ‪ :‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ‪Mounting and dismounting‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻕ‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ‪Basic Load Rating‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ‪The Life Equation‬‬

‫ﺃﺧﺘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ )‪(Bearing Closures‬‬

‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﺎﻧﻜﺎﺭﺩ )‪ (Vanguard‬ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ R‬ﺻﻤﻢ‬

‫ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﻤﻰ ‪ G‬ﻫ ﻮ ﺃﻳﻀ ﺎ ً ﺑﺸ ﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺣ ﺪﺓ ﻭﺻ ﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﻀ ﺮﻭﻑ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻨ ﻮﻉ ‪ V‬ﻣﺠﻬ ﺰ ﺑﺸ ﻔﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟ ﺔ ﻭﻣﺼ ﻤﻢ ﻟﻴﻤﻠ ﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣ ﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻴ ﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻨ ﻮﻉ ‪ T‬ﻣ ﺰﻭﺩ ﺑ ﺜﻼﺙ ﺷ ﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﻤ ﺎ ﻣﺒ ﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳ ﻢ ﻭﺻ ﻤﻤﺖ ﻟﻠﻌﻤ ﻞ‬

‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ )‪(Bearing Numbering System‬‬

Micro Bearing Numbering ‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻱ )‪(Angular Contact Ball Bearing‬‬

(Self Aligning Ball Bearing) ‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‬

(Tapered Roller Bearing) ‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺣﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﻗﺔ‬

(Spherical Roller Bearing) ‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﻣﺳﺎﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺣﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻳﺔ‬

1. SERIES & SIZE

‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ‪Fits and Tolerances‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﻧﺤ ﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳ ﻲ )‪ -: (Fundamental deviation‬ﺃﺣ ﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤ ﺮﺍﻓﻴﻦ ﺍﻟ ﺬﻱ ﺗ ﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴ ﺎﺭﻩ‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬

‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺎﺕ‬

‫‪+٠٫٠٦٥‬‬ ‫‪+٠٫٢٣٥‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪١‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ )‪(Grade of tolerance‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ )ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ(‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪ISO‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ‬

‫‪52‬‬ ‫‪20.000‬‬ ‫‪20.052‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪+ 52‬‬ ‫‪20H9‬‬ ‫ﺛﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺛﻘﺐ‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬

‫ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ‬

‫ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻄﺮﻗﺔ ﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬

‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎ ً‬

‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ )ﺍﻟﻜُﻢ(‬

‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺲ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )‪(Hand Press‬‬